JP6754331B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention is a gaming machine provided with a game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means capable of displaying an effect related to the variable display game on a display device. Regarding.

In some conventional game machines, a plurality of warning displays are displayed on a display device in order of priority (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-56056

However, in the conventional game machine, the first warning display (type 1 error display) is displayed with priority in front of the second warning display so as to hide the second warning display (striking instruction display). , The second warning display (striking instruction display) cannot be visually recognized, which causes a problem.

The present invention aims to Yu technique user to be able to see Uchikata instruction display for instructing Uchikata the (firing mode of game balls).

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect capable of displaying an effect related to the variable display game on a display device. In a game machine provided with control means and capable of generating a predetermined game state advantageous to the player when the result mode of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result mode, a launching means for launching a game ball into a game area and a game A variable winning device is provided, which can convert a ball into a winning easy state and a winning non-easy state in which it is difficult to win, and makes it easier to convert the ball into the winning easy state than in the normal gaming state in the predetermined gaming state. The launching means launches a game ball with a first launch mode in which the game ball is launched with the first launch force and a second launch force different from the first launch force in response to an operation by the player. The game ball can be launched in the second launch mode and the variable winning device, and the game ball can be more easily launched in the second launch mode than in the first launch mode. Arranged in the game area so as to be able to win a prize, the effect control means launches the game ball in the first launch mode when the game ball is launched in the second launch mode in the normal game state. It is possible to display an instruction display for instructing that, and the instruction display includes a first instruction display and a second instruction display displayed in a different form and a different position from the first instruction display . The 1 instruction display can be displayed in combination with the identification information in preference to the identification information, and the error display displayed when an error occurs in the game machine has priority over the 1st instruction display. The second instruction display can be displayed in an overlapping manner with the first instruction display, and the second instruction display can be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode depending on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition in one game state. It is characterized by.

According to an embodiment of the present invention, Yu technique who can confirm Uchikata instruction display for instructing Uchikata.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game control device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the effect control system of a game control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the gate abnormal passage monitoring process. It is a time chart explaining the gate abnormal passage monitoring process. It is another time chart explaining the gate abnormal passage monitoring process. It is still another time chart explaining the gate abnormal passage monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure start port 2 switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game processing. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game processing. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variation start processing. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the miss probability. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of information setting processing. Special Figure 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of information setting processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a variation pattern setting process. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the high probability fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during display of special figure 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during display of special figure 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of magnet fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a modified example of game processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the game processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a modified example of processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half part of a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation interruption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation resumption setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display change processing during change. It is a figure which shows the layout example (display mode example) of the display screen of a display device. It is a figure which shows the other layout example (display mode example) of the display screen of a display device. It is a screen transition diagram (1) which showed the display screen of a display device in time series. It is a screen transition diagram (2) which showed the display screen of a display device in time series. This is another example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in chronological order. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the special figure 1 changing hold display, the special figure 2 changing hold display, and the whole changing hold display. It is a figure which shows the change example of the display mode of the holding display during change in the holding digestion area. It is a detailed view of the pending display during change. It is a figure which shows the other change example of the display mode of the pending display during change in the reserved digestion area. It is a flowchart which shows the warning setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hitting instruction notification setting process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows how the left-handed instruction display and / or the error / illegal display is displayed on the display screen of a display device. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the display device when a movable accessory (movable body) operates in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display content of the information display area (second display area) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the 2nd left-handed instruction display in the information display area (2nd display area) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. Left-handed instruction display (first left-handed instruction display, second left-handed instruction display) and error / incorrect display special display are performed by the warning setting process (including the hitting method instruction notification setting process) according to the second embodiment. It is a time chart showing how it is done.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the game machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

(First Embodiment)
[Overall view of the game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The game machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the gaming state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the game machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the game machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. The variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, it is referred to as a special figure variable display game in the present specification.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. The special game state is, for example, a specific game state (time saving state), a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is likely to occur in a variable display game (probability change state, a probability fluctuation state, a specific game state), and a big hit state ( It is a special game state) and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probabilistic change state continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of fluctuation display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and a predetermined probability fall lottery. There are things that continue until you win (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs, instead of determining whether or not to generate a probabilistic state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on a front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher (launching means) launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the firing force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes having different launching forces. Can fire a ball. The launch modes include a left-handed hit (normal hit, normal launch mode, first launch mode) in which the game ball is caused to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 by the first launch force, and a game ball is caused to flow down on the right side of the game area 32. Right-handed hits (special hits, special launch modes, second launch modes) are included.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbol) and characters for producing the variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a warp passage 40a for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, an inflow port 40e to the warp passage 40a, and a game ball passing through the warp passage 40a are provided. A rollable stage portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the start winning opening unit 820 including the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is the first. It is easy to win a prize in the 1 start winning opening 36 or the 2nd starting winning opening 37.

An upper effect unit 40c is provided on the upper part of the center case 40. The upper effect unit 40c constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a 6-stage flow path 40d that switches the flow direction of the game ball left and right 6 times is provided, and a general winning opening 35 is provided at the uppermost portion of the 6-stage flow path 40d. .. In addition, the second special variation winning device 39 is arranged on the left side of the fifth stage in the middle of the six-stage flow path 40d, and the normal figure start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is located at the bottom of the six-stage flow path 40d. Is provided. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

A start winning opening unit 820 is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40. At the bottom of the start winning opening unit 820, a first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area, starting opening 1) that gives a starting condition (starting condition) of the special figure 1 variable display game when a game ball wins a prize. And a second start winning opening 37 (second starting winning area, starting opening 2) that gives a start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game when the game ball wins a prize.

The start winning opening unit 820 is configured so that the game balls entered from the common entrance 823 are distributed by the winning switching mechanism 825, and the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 can be alternately won. As the winning switching mechanism 825, a known mechanism (for example, described in JP-A-2015-36026 and JP-A-2015-77230) can be used. The winning switching mechanism 825 constitutes an area changing means for changing the winning area.

The winning switching mechanism 825 distributes the game ball entered from the common entrance 823 of the starting winning opening unit 820 to the left side (first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (second starting winning opening 37 side), and the starting winning opening unit. Let it flow down in 820. At the time of left-handed hitting in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32, the game ball is more likely to flow into the common entrance 823 of the starting winning opening unit 820 than at the time of right-handed hitting.

The winning switching mechanism 825 has a rotating member that rotates about a rotation axis with respect to the main body of the starting winning opening unit 820, and a stopper member that stops the rotation of the rotating member. The rotating member has three extending portions extending from the axis of rotation in three directions. The three extending portions provide an L-shaped accommodating portion for accommodating the game ball flowing down to the first starting winning opening 36 and an L-shaped accommodating portion accommodating the game ball flowing down to the second starting winning opening 37. It is formed.

The winning switching mechanism 825 alternately rotates the rotating member to the left side and the right side, and alternately switches the starting winning opening for the game ball to win the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. Unless there is an error, the game ball that has entered the common entrance 823 of the start winning opening unit 820 alternates between the left side (first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (second starting winning opening 37 side) by the winning switching mechanism 825. The first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 are alternately won (balls).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, at the lower left of the normal drawing start gate 34, a special drawing 2 variable display game start condition (starting condition) is given based on the winning of the game ball. A normal variable winning device 33 provided with (second starting winning area) is provided. The Fuden start winning opening (second starting winning area) is included in the category of the second starting winning opening in order to give the start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 2 variable display game. The ordinary variable winning device 33 includes an opening / closing member (movable member) 33b that converts the game ball into a state in which it is easy to flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right. When the opening / closing member (movable member) 33b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 33. The game ball is more likely to flow into the normal variable winning device 33 when hitting right than when hitting left. When the game ball wins the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 33, second starting winning opening 37), the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game. ..

The opening / closing member (movable member) 33b is a so-called electric chew type ordinary electric accessory, and when the result of the normal figure variation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 33c (see FIG. 3) is used. The game ball changes to an open state (a winning easy state which is advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 33.

The movable member 33b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (normal power support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probability change state (excluding the latent probability change state) as the specific game state, the time saving state (Public electricity support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 at the lower left of the normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) 34, the lower grand prize opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) rotates in the direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, thereby causing the lower grand prize opening. A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c for opening the door is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and lowers. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the lower prize opening, a lower prize opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening.

Further, a second special variable winning device 39 (special electric accessory) is provided in the game area 32 (six-stage flow path 40d) on the upper right side of the center case 40. The second special variable winning device 39 is a winning device that opens and closes left and right with the lower part of the movable member 39c (opening / closing member) as an axis by the upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). Similar to the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (player) depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. By converting the game into a game state that is advantageous to the player and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the upper prize opening, an upper prize opening switch 39a (see FIG. 3) (two in the present embodiment) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening.

General winning slot 35, 1st starting winning slot 36, 2nd starting winning slot (normal variable winning device 33, 2nd starting winning slot 37), 1st special variable winning device 38 lower large winning slot, and 2nd special variable When a game ball wins in the upper prize opening of the winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the first special variable winning device 38, an out opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32, a special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 1 game), special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 2) A batch display device 50 for executing the game)) is provided. The batch display device 50 includes a display unit that displays information such as the current gaming state, and the display unit is composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display) and a second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. It has (special figure 2 display) and a variable display unit 58 (normal figure display) for a normal figure variable display game. Further, the batch display device 50 includes a round display unit 53 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) and the occurrence of a small hit, and the number of start (hold) storages of each variable display game. It has a storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 59, normal figure hold display 60) for notification.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit 55 (first game state display, probability state display unit) that displays that the probability state of hit is a high probability state, and a big hit or a small hit. A second game state display unit 56 (second game state display) is provided, which lights up when a probability occurs and notifies that it is time to hit right (when it should hit right). Further, the batch display device 50 is a third game state display unit 57 (third game state display) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted in accordance with a modification described later. It may have a device, a suspension status display unit).

Next, the flow of the game in the game machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the game machine 10, a game is performed by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, and the second The starting winning opening 37, the normal variable winning device 33, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39 is won, or the game area 32 flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32. It is discharged from 32. Then, when a game ball wins a prize in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the ordinary variable winning device 33, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, a prize is won. A number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning openings are discharged to the upper plate 21 via the payout device.

As a basic game method, in the normal game state, the player left-handed to aim at the common entrance 823 of the start winning opening unit 820 and let the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 win a game ball. The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are started by, and when a small hit / big hit or a probability change state occurs, the player switches to right-handed, and the normal variable winning device 33 or the upper large winning opening Aim for the lower prize opening. The display device 41 can display instructions (displaying instructions on how to hit, notifying how to hit) instructing the player whether to hit left or right, and displays when the player does not follow the instructions. The error can be notified by the device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b.

The normal drawing start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state in which the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 33 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal figure fluctuation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 58 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 58 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the light is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 58 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the solenoid solenoid 33c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 33b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 33 Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 33, second starting winning opening 37) are the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting, respectively. It is detected by the mouth 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). For the sake of simplicity, the start port switches provided in the second start winning opening 37 and the normal electric start winning opening of the ordinary variable winning device 33 are collectively referred to as the start opening 2 switch 37a. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit (4 in this embodiment), and is stored in the second starting winning opening. The game ball that has won the (ordinary variable winning device 33, the second starting winning opening 37) is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit (4 in this embodiment). To.

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted. These random values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory (special figure start memory) for a predetermined number of times (for example, in the special figure 1 variable display game) at the maximum. It is stored up to 4 times). The number of stored special figure 1 start prize memories (special figure 1 start memory) is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed. The number of memories of the special figure 2 start winning memory (special figure 2 start memory) is displayed on the special figure 2 hold display 59 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 changes the special figure 2 on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 33, the second starting winning opening 37) or the second start memory. The display game (second special figure variation display game) is executed.

In the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the identification information (special symbol 1 (special figure 1), special symbol 2 (special figure 2)) is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be in the execution state at the same time (both) independently of each other, but one of the special figure variable display games has a big hit or a small hit. When it occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed as a stop), the other special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a missed result.

For example, the special figure 1 variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment and the point portion of the 7-segment type display) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 1 display 51. Special Figure 1 Variable display The stop display (off symbol, off display) of the off-set result of the game may be a display in which the central segment and the point portion are lit. Special Figure 1 Variable display The stop display of the jackpot result of the game (big hit symbol, jackpot display) is a plurality of displays corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot (R) and the game state (normal state or probability change state) after the jackpot ends (normal state or probability change state). Design) can exist. Special Figure 1 There are multiple types of stop display (small hit symbol, small hit display) of the small hit result of the variable display game, but the opening pattern (opening time, etc.) of the big winning opening by small hit is the same one type (opening time, etc.) Special figure 1 small hit) is all that is required.

In this embodiment, in all types of jackpots, the probability variation state continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of variable display games are executed after the jackpot ends. That is, the game machine is an ST (special time) machine, and the jackpot symbol is only the probability variation symbol.

The special figure 2 variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment and the point portion of the 7-segment type display) is repeatedly turned on and off on the special figure 2 display 52. Special Figure 2 The stop display (off symbol, off display) of the out-of-order result of the variable display game may be a display in which the central segment is lit. Special Figure 2 Variable display The stop display of the jackpot result of the game (big hit symbol, jackpot display) is a plurality of displays corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot (R) and the game state (normal state or probability change state) after the jackpot ends (normal state or probability change state). Design) can exist. Special figure 2 There are multiple types of stop display (small hit symbol, small hit display) of the small hit result of the variable display game, and there are three types of opening patterns (opening time, etc.) of the big winning opening by small hit (special figure). 2 small hits 1, 2, 3) may be used. In addition, in the special figure 2 small hits 1, 2 and 3, the open large winning opening (upper large winning opening or lower large winning opening) may be different, and depending on the small hit design, the upper large winning opening or the lower large winning opening may be different. Either one will open in a predetermined opening pattern.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as other decorative special symbols (identification information), the lower left light emitting unit 85 and the lower right light emitting unit provided in the lamp display device 80 by repeating (blinking) lighting display and turning off display are emitted. Part 86 may change as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). The lamp display device 80 is composed of a plurality of light emitting units (LEDs) and is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

After a predetermined time from the start, the variation display of the fourth special symbol is stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit. The variable display of the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) is displayed by the light emitting units 85 and 86 (LEDs) of the lamp display device 80, but may be displayed by other display devices 41 or sub-display devices.

Here, the lamp display device 80 will be described. The light emitting unit 81 on the upper left and the light emitting unit 82 on the upper right notify information regarding the holding of the special figure 2 (here, the number of holdings of the special figure 2), and the light emitting unit 83 on the middle left. And the light emitting unit 84 on the middle right notifies the information regarding the holding of the special figure 1 (here, the number of holdings of the special figure 1). The light emitting unit 85 at the lower left displays the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the light emitting unit 86 at the lower right displays the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) of the special figure 2 variable display game. ) Is displayed.

When the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 33, second starting winning opening 37) at a predetermined timing (the jackpot random value at the time of winning detection is a jackpot). In the case of a value), a special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39 is energized by energizing the lower winning opening solenoid (38b) and / or the upper winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). , The big winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, several seconds or several tens of seconds). That is, the large winning openings provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, during which the player opens many game balls. The privilege of being able to obtain it is given.

When the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 33, second starting winning opening 37) at a predetermined timing (the jackpot random number value at the time of winning detection is small). In the case of a hit value), a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol as a result of the special figure variation display game, and a small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39 is a large winning opening by energizing the lower winning opening solenoid 38b and / or the upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). Is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time (for example, 2 seconds or less).

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device (the first special variable winning device 38 and / or the second special variable winning device 39) is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released. Since the big hit is longer than the small hit during the full opening period during the hit state of the special variable winning device, the game value (prize ball) given to the player by the big hit is usually larger than the small hit. Become.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are configured as separate displays, and each special figure variation display game may be simultaneously executed (executed state), but on the other hand, When a big hit or a small hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (a special result or a specific result is derived and stopped and displayed), the other special figure fluctuation display game being executed is forcibly missed. Stop.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. Further, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be simultaneously executed (executed state), but one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be executed. When a big hit or a small hit occurs (a special result or a specific result is derived and displayed as a stop), the other decorative special figure variation display game being executed is forcibly stopped with a missed result.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, each starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 33 and the second starting winning opening 37, and the winning opening switch The 35a and count switches (38a, 39a) are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. Proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is used as a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from the voltage of DC32V. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. A control signal generation unit 430 or the like that generates and outputs a control signal such as

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Will be done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111c is a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach) and special 1 reach (SP1 reach) are used. , Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), Premier reach are set. The expected degree (expected value) of the jackpot is increased in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111a and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. ..

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 33, and a first. 2 Each start port in the start winning opening 37 2 Switch 37a, Gate switch 34a, Winning opening switch 35a, Lower big winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, Upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39 An interface chip (proximity I / F) that is connected to switches 39a, receives negative logic signals such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches, and converts them into 0V-5V positive logic signals. ) 121 is provided.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, each start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a are It is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal is input from the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12, and the like. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and each start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. A first input port 122 is provided that takes in the overflow switch signal and the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 and supplies the touch switch signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command. It is a signal. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (lower large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special variable winning device 38, and a solenoid (upper large winning opening) that opens the second special variable winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting open / close data of the solenoid) 39b is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and provides information about the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the general electric current solenoid 33c, the lower prize opening solenoid 38b, and the upper prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. Output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. External information terminal 71 supplies an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50. A fourth driver 138d is provided to output to.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the game machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is used to display images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is provided with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is supplied with a program ROM 321 composed of a program executed by the CPU (effect control program) and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and power in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can hold stored contents at least, and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, DC5V for driving command I / F331, and DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDP RESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuit 332-334 (IOReSET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.

The start winning (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the starting memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 33 and the second starting winning opening 37, and the special figure 2 variable display is based on the starting memory. A random value for determining the jackpot of the game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and displays the special result mode and the special game state (big hit). State) is generated. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a opens, for example, the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, or the second special variable winning device 39 is movable by the large winning opening solenoid 39b. The member 39c is opened to control the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening.

Then, whether a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or whether a predetermined opening time (for example, about 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. One round is to open the big winning opening until any of the conditions is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times, 8 times, 4 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). )I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result (a big hit result in the present embodiment) in the special figure variation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state (low probability state). In addition, a high probability state is established based on the result mode of either the special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) or the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game). Even so, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is controlled to be shortened. In the present embodiment, the high probability state and the time saving state are configured to occur at the same time, but it is also possible to generate each independently and only one of them can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6 performed at a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (milliseconds) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the step code (number) is represented as "A ***" or "S ***".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (A1007). A subordinate control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power-on delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the program starts normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the standby time has elapsed. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

When the power-on delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (for example, twice). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Judgment (A1010). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal has been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 is a game machine. Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when a power failure has not occurred (A1011). It is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked in step A1008.

Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time has expired, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output (set to no output) to all output ports (A1014).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read earlier (A1016).

When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data. (A1017). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). , It is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 of FIG. 5B, and the process of normally recovering from the power failure is executed.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data when the initialization switch is on (the result of A1016 is “Y”) (the result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is "N") and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1023 of FIG. 5B to execute the initialization process. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

The game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The area to be initialized is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area (payout busy signal flag area) that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is changed. It is an indefinite state indicating that it is not fixed.

Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1022), and the process of step A1028 is executed. Commands for recovery from a power failure include a model specification command indicating the type of game machine, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command indicating the number of holds in special figure 1, a probability information command indicating the probability status, a screen specification command, and the like. .. The screen designation command is a command for designating the display contents of the display device 41. For example, when both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are normally being processed (when neither variable nor hit operation is in progress). Is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery is when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (backed up by RWM) as in the modified example of FIGS. 42 to 49 described later. (When there is a special figure game interruption flag) includes a suspended command (interrupted command) indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended. Good.

On the other hand, when the process of step A1023 is executed after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to the access permission (A1023). Further, all the RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1024), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1025).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1026). The area to be initialized is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Further, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (A1027), and executes the process of step A1028. The command at the time of RAM initialization includes a model designation command, a decorative special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command, and the like. In response to the RAM initialization command, the effect control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the screen of the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization by the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 and the upper speakers 19a and 19b. Do (eg 30 seconds).

In addition, the command at the time of power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1022 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1027 further include an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time saving state. Includes a time saving information command that indicates the number of games remaining in.

The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1028). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After executing the CTC activation process in step A1028, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1029). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol). The initial value (start value) of the random number 1 and the jackpot symbol random number 2)) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1030), and the interrupt is permitted (A1031). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1032). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle.

Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step A1032, the game control device 100 sets the number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1033), and power failure monitoring. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1034). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1034 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process in step A1032. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By allowing an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1032) (A1031), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be initially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on interrupt processing by making it wait by the value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process of step A1032, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. If such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is used in both cases. In order to avoid executing the update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1033. Judgment (A1035). Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is "N"), the process returns to step A1034 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

Further, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (the result of A1035 is "Y"), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1036), and off-data is output to all output ports (A1037).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1038), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1039). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1040), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1041). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1042), and the game waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111c capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, the output process for performing the drive control of the actuator such as the solenoid (the winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) is executed (A1304). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state. ..

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1305) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1306) and random number update. Process 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of errors. (A1308), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process of monitoring the winning of the start port by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A1309). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1310), and then the special figure 2 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1311). The details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. Next, the normal map game process for performing the process related to the normal map variable display game is executed (A1312). The details of the normal figure game processing will be described later in FIG. 38.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a segment LED editing process which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. (A1313). In the segment LED editing process, a round display unit 53 provided in the batch display device 50, a special figure 1 hold display (memory display unit) 54, a first game state display unit 55, a second game state display unit 56, and the like are configured. Make settings related to driving the segment LED.

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1314). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1315). The details of the magnet fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. The details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1316). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated. When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing processing. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. The winning port switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a fraud monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper prize opening switches 39a (two) in the upper prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) (A2001). Then, even though the large winning opening is not open, the fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening is executed (A2002).

In the fraud monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and fraud Information on the upper limit of the number of winnings (the number of frauds judged), the winning opening monitoring table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, in the winning opening monitoring table, information on the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. These fraud monitoring tables and winning opening monitoring tables are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the fraud monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower grand prize opening switch 38a in the lower grand prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) (A2003). Then, the fraudulent and winning monitoring process for monitoring the fraudulent winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches (here, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a of general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize (A2005). ), The winning number counter update process for updating the winning number is executed (A2006).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a gate abnormality passage monitoring process (A2007). In the gate abnormal passage monitoring process, the number of abnormal passages of the game ball with respect to the normal drawing start gate 34 is counted in the normal game state (when the probability is low), and an error occurs when the number of abnormal passages reaches a specified value (for example, 5). The effect control device 300 is made to execute the notification. The details of the gate abnormality passage monitoring process will be described later in FIG.

Next, the game control device 100 updates a state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches for monitoring the state and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time (A2008). ). The status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2009). Then, a game machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2010). The details of the game machine state check process will be described later in FIG.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, etc. (switch abnormality) (1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball burnout error) based on the shoot ball burnout switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormality status signal (payout error). Monitoring is set up.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a game machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame opening error) based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch is monitored. Is set and the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (main unit frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave invalid signal (frame radio wave invalidity) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2013). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2013 is "N"), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the game machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

Further, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2013 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the game machine state monitoring table 3 (A2014), and whether an error has occurred, etc. The game machine state check process for determining the state of is executed (A2015).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormality). 2 error) monitoring is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2016). ), End the winning opening switch / status monitoring process.

Since the processes from steps A2014 to A2016 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, the processes are executed once every four timer interrupts. .. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes from A2014 to A2016 are performed every 16 ms.

[Gate abnormal passage monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate abnormal passage monitoring process. The gate abnormality passage monitoring process is executed in step A2007 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 7.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation check flag is set (A2401). As will be described later, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game starts in a state where the hit probability is low (including a normal game state). When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not set (the result of A2401 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (A2402), and updates the special figure 1 fluctuation number by +1 ( Add only 1) (A2403). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (for example, 18) (A2404). When the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2407.

When the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 is equal to or greater than the specified value (the result of A2404 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the number of abnormal gate passages is not 0 (A2405). Fig. 1 Clear the number of fluctuations to 0 (A2406).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game state (the game state to be left-handed) and whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A2407). If the player is not currently in the normal gaming state or there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A2407 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2410.

When the game control device 100 receives an input to the gate switch 34a during the normal game state (the result of A2407 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the final fluctuation is in high probability (A2408). Whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high probability final fluctuation flag set in the high probability fluctuation number update process described later. If the final fluctuation with high probability is in progress (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2410. When the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A2408 is "N"), the number of abnormal gate passages is updated by +1 (A2409). After that, it is determined whether or not the number of abnormal gate passages is smaller than the specified value (for example, 5) (A2410).

Here, the high-probability final variation (high-probability final variation) is the final special figure variation display game when the special figure variation display game starts in a high-probability state, for example, ST (special time). This is the final special figure fluctuation display game in the case where the high probability state is maintained for the start of fluctuations a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the end of the jackpot.

When the number of abnormal gate passages is equal to or greater than the specified value (the result of A2410 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets the number of abnormal gate passages to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the specified value used for the determination in step A2410 ( A2411). Next, an initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is set in the gate abnormal passage notification timer as the error notification timer (A2412), a gate abnormal passage occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the gate abnormal passage is prepared (A2413), and as an effect command. The gate abnormal passage occurrence command is prepared (A2414), and the process proceeds to step A2419. The gate abnormal passage occurrence flag and the gate abnormal passage occurrence command indicate that the game ball has abnormally passed through the normal drawing start gate 34.

When the number of gate abnormal passages is smaller than the specified value (the result of A2410 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the gate abnormal passage notification timer by -1 (A2415). Next, it is determined whether or not the gate abnormality passage notification timer has timed up (A2416). If the time is not up (the result of A2416 is "N"), the gate abnormality passage monitoring process is terminated.

When the time is up (the result of A2416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the gate abnormal passage release flag (A2417), and prepares the gate abnormal passage release command as an effect command (A2418). Next, it is determined whether or not the prepared flag is the same as the value of the current gate abnormal passage flag area (A2419). When the prepared flag is the same as the value of the current gate abnormal passage flag area (the result of A2419 is "Y"), the gate abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated.

When the prepared flag is different from the value of the current gate abnormal passage flag area (the result of A2419 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prepared flag is the gate abnormal passage release flag ( A2420). If the prepared flag is not a release flag (the result of A2420 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2422.

When the prepared flag is a release flag (the result of A2420 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the number of abnormal gate passages to 0 (A2421). That is, when the gate abnormal passage release flag is prepared in the state where the gate abnormal passage occurrence flag is set in the gate abnormal passage flag region (A2417), the number of gate abnormal passages is cleared to 0. After that, the prepared flag is saved in the gate abnormal passage flag area in the RWM (A2422). That is, when the prepared flag is different from the flag of the current gate abnormal passage flag area, the gate abnormal passage flag area is rewritten to the prepared flag. Next, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2423), and the gate abnormality passage monitoring process is terminated. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

When the gate abnormal passage occurrence flag indicating the occurrence of the gate abnormal passage (abnormal passage state of the game ball with respect to the normal figure start gate 34) is saved in the gate abnormal passage flag area, a security signal is transmitted by the external information editing process described later. Is output to an external device (such as a hall computer) as external information. When the effect control device 300 receives the gate abnormality passage occurrence command as the effect command, the effect control device 300 executes an error notification on the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b. In particular, the effect control device 300 executes an error display (warning display) on the display device 41, and generates a warning sound from the speakers 19a and 19b.

In the normal gaming state (the jackpot probability is low), the player usually aims to win the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37 by hitting left, but the player may hit right. .. In this case, an error is notified so that the player can stop right-handed striking. In the normal game state, when left-handed is performed, processing is performed by the normal route as shown by the dotted line in FIG. 8, the gate abnormal passage occurrence command (that is, error notification) is not generated, and the gate abnormal passage is not generated. The notification timer does not start either.

The gate abnormality passage monitoring process will be further described with reference to the time chart of FIGS. 9A-9C. 9A-9C exemplify the result of the above-mentioned gate abnormal passage monitoring process.

As shown in FIG. 9A, when there are multiple inputs to the gate switch 34a in the normal gaming state and the number of abnormal gate passes reaches a specified value (here, 5) (the result of A2410 is “N”), the abnormal gate passes. The initial value of the notification timer (60 seconds) and the gate abnormal passage occurrence command can be set (A2412, A2414), and the effect control device 300 that has received the gate abnormal passage occurrence command notifies the error on the display device 41 and the speakers 19a and 19b. Can be started.

After that, since the number of abnormal gate passages is subtracted by 1 from the specified value (5 in this case) (A2411), unless there is an input to the gate switch 34a during the normal gaming state, the gate will be gated from the next abnormal gate passage monitoring process. The abnormal passage notification timer is continuously updated by -1 and can be timed (the result of A2410 is "Y"). The effect control device 300 can continue the error notification until the gate abnormality passage notification timer times out after the lapse of the period (60 seconds) corresponding to the initial value and the gate abnormality passage release command is received. The prize balls are paid out even during the error notification.

During the error notification period (60 seconds), external information is output to the external information terminal 71, the occurrence of an error can be notified to an external device such as a hall computer, and when a test firing test is performed, the test firing test device is played. Machine error status signal can be output (external information editing process).

When the number of gate abnormal passages reaches the specified value (5 in this case) again during the timing of the gate abnormal passage notification timer (during error notification), the initial value of the gate abnormal passage notification timer is set again, and 60 from there. Error notification for seconds can be started (timer reset). Further, when a big hit occurs (starts), a gate abnormality passage release command is transmitted, and the gate abnormality passage number, the gate abnormality passage notification timer, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number are cleared to 0.

Further, in the control of FIG. 8, the number of gate abnormal passages is set to 0 after the error notification by the gate abnormal passage cancellation command is completed as shown in FIG. 9A (A2421), but the number of gate abnormal passages is set as shown in FIG. 9B. It may be maintained at the specified value.

In FIG. 9C, when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 reaches the specified value (18 in this case) (the result of A2404 is “N”), the number of abnormal gate passages is updated by -1 and decreases from 4 to 3, for example (A2405). ), The situation in which the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is cleared to 0 and changes from 18 to 0 is shown (A2406). In this way, in the normal game state, even if the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 multiple times by right-handed and the number of abnormal gate passages increases, the player returns to left-handed (stop right-handed). ), When the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 reaches the specified value, the number of abnormal gate passages decreases and error notification can be avoided.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game machine state check process. The game machine state check process is executed in steps A2010, A2012, and A2015 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG. 7.

The game control device 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2501). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 according to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG. 7.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the signal to be checked is on (A2502). When the signal to be checked is not on (the result of A2502 is "N"), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2503), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2504). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2505). The state off flag indicates a normal state for an error-type signal, and indicates a non-touch state for a touch switch signal.

On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (the result of A2502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the state on flag as the state flag (A2506), acquires the target state on command, and prepares it. (A2507). Further, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2508). The state-on flag indicates an abnormal or invalid state for an error-type signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

When the process of step A2505 or step A2508 is completed, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2509). If they do not match (the result of A2509 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2510), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2511).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2512). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated condition monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2513). If the value of the updated status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is "N"), the gaming machine status check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the updated status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2513 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the status monitoring timer by -1 and the timer comparison value-. Keep the value at 1 (A2514). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (A2515). If they match (the result of A2515 is "Y"), the game machine status check process ends.

On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2515 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2516). Finally, the effect command setting process for setting the effect command is executed (A2517), and the game machine status check process is completed. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state-on command is an error-type command, the effect control device 300 is started to notify the error.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table (A2701) for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1), and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, if there is no starting opening prize (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a low probability state when there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y") (A2704). .. Then, in the case of a low probability state (including during the normal gaming state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2707.

When the probability of hit occurrence is not in the low probability state (when the probability is high) (the result of A2704 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a right-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A2705), and produces the effect. The command setting process is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 can display the right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed on the display device 41 as a warning when the first start-up winning opening 36 has a starting opening winning in a high probability state. it can.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table (A2707) for setting the information of holding by winning the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), and executes the special figure starting opening 1 switch process (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 2 winning monitoring table (A2709) for monitoring the winning of the second starting winning opening (starting port 2) 37, and executes a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number. (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 33, second starting winning opening 37) (A2711). If there is no start port winning (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

In the game control device 100, when there is a start opening prize in the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 33, second starting winning opening 37) (the result of A2711 is "Y"), the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "Y"). Prepare a table (A2712) for setting information on holding by winning a prize in the start port 2, the normal variable winning device 33 or the second start winning opening 37), execute the special figure start port 2 switch process (A2713), and start. End the mouth switch monitoring process.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 1 switch process (A2708) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port 1 switch processing.

First, the game control device 100 loads the number of times the start port 1 signal is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times the winning is won to the start port 1 switch 36a is output to the external management device of the game machine 10 (A2901). Further, the value of the loaded start port 1 signal output count is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903).

If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start port 1 signal output count area of the RWM (A2904). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process of step A2905 is executed without executing the process of step A2904.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting port 1 switch 36a is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port 1 switch processing is terminated.

When the number of special figure reservations is less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A2906) and updates the number of special figure 1 reservations by +1. (A2907). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 1 corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (A2909). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2910), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM ( A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure reservation information determination process (look-ahead processing, pre-determination process) for determining the special figure reservation information (A2914), and the decorative special figure 1 hold number indicating the special figure 1 hold number. The command is prepared as an effect command (A2915), the effect command setting process is executed (A2916), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is completed. The details of the special figure reservation information determination process will be described later in FIG.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port 2 switch process (A2718) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port 2 switch processing.

The start port 2 signal output number of times, which is the number of times to output information about the number of times of winning to the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (A3001). further,
The value of the loaded start port 2 signal output count is updated by +1 (A3002), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A3003).

If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the start port 2 signal output count area of the RWM (A3004). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the process of step A3005 is executed without executing the process of step A3004.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memories) to be updated corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A3005). If the number of special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A3005 is "N"), the special figure start port 2 switch processing is terminated.

When the number of special figure reservations is less than the upper limit value (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3006) and updates the number of special figure 2 reservations by +1. (A3007). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 2 (A3008), and stores the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. Save to (A3009). Subsequently, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A3010), and the jackpot symbol random number is saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3011). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A3012). Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area (variation pattern random number 1 storage area, variation pattern random number 2 storage area, variation pattern random number 3 storage area) of the RWM ( A3013).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure reservation information determination process (look-ahead processing, pre-determination process) for determining the special figure reservation information (A3014), and the decorative special figure 2 hold number indicating the special figure 2 hold number. The command is prepared as an effect command (A3015), the effect command setting process is executed (A3016), and the special figure start port 2 switch process is completed. The details of the special figure reservation information determination process will be described later in FIG.

As described above, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) receives the inflow of the game ball into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 33, second starting winning opening 37). Based on this, it serves as a start winning prize storage means that extracts a predetermined random number and stores a predetermined number as a start memory that is an execution right of the variable display game. Further, the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 in the first start storage (for example, 4) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4). Various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 33, second starting winning opening 37) stored as special drawing 1 starting memory, special drawing 1 starting winning memory). Is stored as a second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 start winning memory) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4).

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination processing (A2914, A3014) in the special figure start port 1 switch process and the special figure start port 2 switch process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination process (look-ahead process, pre-determination process).

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3101). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3101 is "N"), it is determined whether or not it is in the jackpot state (A3102). When the jackpot state is not in progress (the result of A3102 is "N"), the jackpot determination process is executed based on the jackpot random number value stored as the first start memory (A3103).

In addition, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A3101 is "Y") or in the big hit state (the result of A3102 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process does not perform the jackpot determination process or the like. It ends as it is (preliminary judgment (look-ahead) is not performed).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3104). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3104 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (A3105), the big hit stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (A3106), and step A3111 Move to the processing of.

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process is not a jackpot (in the case of a miss) (the result of A3104 is "N"), the game control device 100 performs the jackpot determination process based on the jackpot random number value stored as the first start memory. It is executed (A3107), and it is determined whether or not the determination result is a small hit (A3108). In this embodiment, a big hit random number is also used for determining a small hit.

When the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (the result of A3108 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the small hit (A3109), and the determination result is not a small hit (A3108). The result of is "N"), and the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (A3110).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the acquired or set stop symbol information as an effect command (A3111), and executes the effect command setting process (A3112). Then, the special figure 1 information setting process (A3113) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the special figure 1 for setting the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game. The variation pattern setting process (A3114) is executed. Subsequently, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number and the second half fluctuation number is prepared as an effect command (A3115), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3116).

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3201). Special Figure 2 When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3201 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3202). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3203). Special figure 1 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit medium state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the process of step A3203 is performed without the process of step A3202. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3204). Special figure 1 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3204 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3219.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3204 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is assigned to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3205). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3206). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 1 game processing number is executed (A3207).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3207, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and sets the effect. In addition, special figure 1 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 changing processing is executed (A3208). The details of the special drawing 1 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1. Special Figure 1 Performing the processing during fluctuation (A3209). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 1 will be described later in FIG. 31.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of big hit, and if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, each Special Figure 1 Displaying processing is executed, which sets the fanfare time according to the jackpot opening pattern, sets the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like (A3210).

For example, in the special figure 1 display processing, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command, a right-handed instruction notification command, and a big hit fanfare time is set, and the fanfare / interval is in progress. Set the process number "3" related to the process and save it in the special figure game process number area. Special figure 1 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command and the small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number "7" related to the small hit fanfare intermediate processing. Save to the game processing number area. If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order, the processing number "0" related to the special figure 1 normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area, and if it is a high probability final fluctuation, the probability information Set a command (low probability) as a production command.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs processing during opening of the large winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3211). For example, in the fanfare / interval processing, necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the large winning opening is set, and the processing number "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Set and save in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

In step A3207, when the game processing number is "4", the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3212), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set. For example, in the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, the processing number "5" related to the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. ..

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round. The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A3213). For example, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "3" related to the fanfare / interval processing is set, and the special figure game processing number area is set. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the jackpot end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), and special figure 1 information necessary for executing normal processing. (A3214), the special figure 1 jackpot end process for setting and the like is executed. The details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process will be described later in FIG. 34.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for performing the small hit medium processing, and the like. The processing during the small hit fanfare is executed (A3215). For example, in the small hit fanfare middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit opening time of the big winning opening is set, the processing number "8" related to the small hit middle processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area. ..

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small hit setting of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3216). For example, in the small hit middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit remaining ball processing time is set, the processing number “9” related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3207, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and a special figure 1 small hit end process. The small hit remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for the operation is executed (A3217). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, necessary information such as the small hit ending time is set, the processing number “10” related to the special figure 1 small hit end processing is set, and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3207, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), and special figure 1 information necessary for executing normal processing. The special figure 1 small hit end process for setting and the like is executed (A3218). The details of the special figure 1 small hit end process will be described later in FIG. 36.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3219), and then displays the special figure 1. The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3220), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. This symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 (special symbol 1) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (A1311) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is in the big hit state or the small hit state (A3301). Special Figure 2 When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3301 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball is played by the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection.

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3303). Special figure 2 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit medium state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the process of step A3303 is performed without the process of step A3302. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3304). Special figure 2 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3304 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3322.

The game control device 100 uses the special figure 2 game processing timer when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up. It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (A3305). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3306), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. A timer value for length variation (for example, 20000 msec (20 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3307). By the process of steps A3303-A3307, the timer value for long fluctuation is repeated for the number of times of repetition, and a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3304 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”). , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register (A3308). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3309). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and the game branching process according to the special figure 2 game processing number is executed (A3310).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3310, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and sets the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game and sets the effect. In addition, special figure 2 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 changing processing is executed (A3311). The details of the special drawing 2 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2 and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 2. Special Figure 2 Performing the processing during fluctuation (A3312). The details of the processing during fluctuation in FIG. 2 will be described later in FIG. 32.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the type of big hit, and if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, each Special Figure 2 Displaying processing is executed, which sets the fanfare time according to the jackpot opening pattern, sets the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like (A3313). The special figure 2 display process is the same as the special figure 1 display process in which the special figure 1 is replaced with the special figure 2.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs processing during opening of the large winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3314). The fanfare / interval processing is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game processing.

In step A3310, when the game processing number is "4", the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3315), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set. The process during opening of the large winning opening is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game process.

In step A3310, when the game processing number is "5", the game control device 100 sets a process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round. The big winning opening remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is executed (A3316). The processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game processing.

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process (the special figure 2 jackpot end process). A3317). The details of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing will be described later in FIG. 35.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3310, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for performing the small hit medium processing, and the like. The processing during the small hit fanfare is executed (A3318). The processing during the small hit fanfare is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game processing.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small hit setting of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3319). The small hit medium processing is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game processing.

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3310, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a time for the remaining balls in the large winning opening to be discharged, and a special figure 2 small hit end process. The small hit remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for the operation is executed (A3320). The small hit remaining ball processing is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game processing.

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3310, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3321). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end process will be described later in FIG. 37.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3322), and then displays the special figure 2. The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3323), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated. This symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 (special symbol 2) and setting the display data of the special symbol.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (A3208) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3501). If the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start variable (if the variable start is not possible) (the result of A3501 is "N"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM. Save (A3502). Here, from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the jackpot operation (processing of the end of the special figure 2 jackpot), and the small of the special figure 2 variation display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (process of ending the small hit of the special figure 2), it is said that the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the variation.

When the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (A3503). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as the effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (the result of A3503 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3507.

If the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified (the result of A3503 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3504), executes the effect command setting process (A3505), and displays it. A left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) by the device 41 or the like is set (A3506).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 0 (A3507). When the number of special figures 1 held is 0 (the result of A3507 is "Y"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3502). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reserved is 1 or more.

When the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3507 is "N"), the game control device 100 uses a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) as an effect command. Prepare (A3508) and execute the effect command setting process (A3509). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3510). After that, the decorative special figure 1 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3511), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3512).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3513). Here, the information of the special figure 1 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, it is determined whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A3514), and if it is not in a high probability state (in a low probability state) (the result of A3514 is "N"), the high probability final fluctuation is in progress. It is determined whether or not (A3515). Whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress can be determined based on the high-probability final fluctuation flag described later.

When the game control device 100 is not in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (A3516), and the special figure 1 fluctuation processing transition setting process is executed (A3517). ). The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is used in the above-mentioned gate abnormality passage monitoring process (FIG. 8). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, "1" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the special figure 1 changing processing, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high-probability state (the result of A3514 is "Y") or is in the high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A3515 is "Y"), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag Is not set, and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is executed (A3517).

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (A3311) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (A3601). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is not variable startable (when the variable start is not possible) (the result of A3601 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM. Save (A3602). Here, from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the jackpot operation (processing of the end of the special figure 1 jackpot), and the small of the special figure 1 variation display game. From the end of the hit variation (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the small hit operation (process of ending the small hit of the special figure 1), it is said that the special figure 2 variation display game cannot start the variation.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is 0 when the special figure 2 variation display game can start fluctuation (the result of A3601 is “Y”) (A3602). Special figure 2 When the number of pending numbers is not 0 (the result of A3602 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) is prepared as an effect command (A3603). The effect command setting process is executed (A3604). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3605).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 2 hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3606), and executes the effect command setting process (A3607). Then, the information during the change of the special figure 2 is set in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3608). Here, the information of the special figure 2 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (A3609). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, "1" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the special figure 2 changing processing, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area.

In the game control device 100, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0 (the result of A3602 is “Y”),
It is determined whether or not the number of pending special figures 1 is 0 (A3610). When the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3610 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3611). When the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A3611 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3612). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3612 is "N"), the customer waiting demo in progress flag is set (A3613).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3614), and executes the effect command setting process (A3615). The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3616). As a result, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the special figure 2 hold number becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the number of special figure 1 hold is not 0 (the result of A3610 is "N"), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed. Therefore, the special figure 1 of RWM is not prepared without preparing the customer waiting demo command. FIG. 2 Special figure 2 The processing number "0" is usually saved in the game processing number area (A3616). Also, when the special figure 1 is changing (the result of A3611 is "Y"), or when the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3612 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. Instead, save the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3616).

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3510) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3701). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3702) for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot, and the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information). ), The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3703), and the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game are executed. To do.

In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a miss, a small hit, or a big hit, and the missed stop symbol pattern, the small hit stop symbol pattern, or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. To do. Then, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. In addition, the round number information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop symbol number at the time of a big hit is acquired and saved.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3705). ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3706) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3706). A3707) is executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (that is, a probability variation state) (A3708). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3708 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (A3709). When the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (the result of A3709 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A3710).

When the special figure 2 is changing (the result of A3710 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3711). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3711 is "Y"), that is, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is within the time value of the special figure 2 game processing timer. If, the process proceeds to step A3714.

When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3711 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more as a predetermined number of times. Is determined (A3712). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is less than a predetermined number of times (4 in this case) (the result of A3712 is “N”), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated (A3713). The remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is calculated by the value of (special figure 2 game processing timer area value + number of repetitions × 60,000 msec).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3714). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to start is equal to or longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (the result of A3714 is "N"), the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is more special. FIG. 2 A command for notifying that the fluctuation time is longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3715), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3716). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is equal to or longer than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, etc., the display device 41 decorates the special figure 1 variable display. Game-related renditions may end abruptly. Therefore, the effect control device 300 that has received the above command sets (changes) the effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game to, for example, a non-flashy one so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a high-probability variation number update process (A3717) that updates and manages the variation number (remaining number) of the special figure variation display game that starts in the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variation start process. To finish.

On the other hand, when it is in a high probability state (the result of A3708 is "Y"), when it is in the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A3709 is "Y"), and when the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A3710 is "Y"). In "N"), the processing of steps A3711 to A3716 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the processing of step A3717.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is equal to or more than a predetermined number (the result of A3712 is “Y”), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is the special figure 1. Since it is longer than the maximum variable time of the variable display game, the process proceeds to step A3717 without preparing a command for notifying that the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game is longer.

Further, the game control device 100 also determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3714 is “Y”), the special figure 1 variation display game. The process proceeds to step A3717 without preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time of is longer.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3605) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 2 information setting flag (A3801). The special figure 2 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Next, the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3802) for setting the jackpot flag 2 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot, and the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3803), and the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game are executed. To do.

In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of a miss, a small hit, or a big hit, and the missed stop symbol pattern, the small hit stop symbol pattern, or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. To do. Then, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process is executed. In addition, the round number information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stop symbol number at the time of a big hit is acquired and saved.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3805). ). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (A3806) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 2 variation display game, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3806). A3807), the high-probability variation number update process for updating and managing the number of fluctuations (remaining number) of the special figure variation display game starting in the high probability state is executed (A3808), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3702) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3901a), and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM (A3902a). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM (A3903a). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904a).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3905a). When the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A3905a is "N"), a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3906a). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907a). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907a is "Y"), the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902 is overwritten and saved (A3908a), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Note that the jackpot flag 1 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area), so that it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

The game control device 100 acquires the jackpot flag 2 when the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3905a is "Y") or when the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3907a is "N"). Based on the big hit random value, the small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit is executed (A3909a), and the result of the determination is determined whether or not it is a small hit (A3909a). A3910a). In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). When the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910a is "Y"), the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3901a is overwritten and saved (A3911a). The jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated. When the special figure 1 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910a is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3802) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

In the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the "small hit flag 1" in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (FIG. 21A) is changed to the "small hit flag 2", the "big hit flag 1" is changed to the "big hit flag 2", and the "big hit flag 2" is set. Is replaced with "big hit flag 1" and "special figure 1" is replaced with "special figure 2". Since the same processing as the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The steps A3901b-A3911b in the jackpot flag 2 setting process correspond to steps A3901a-A3911a in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, respectively.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process (A3906a, A3906b) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, and the like will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3103 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A4007), and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a hit is in a high probability state (A4003). .. Then, in the case of a high probability state (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A4004). On the other hand, when the probability is not high (the result of A4003 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A4005).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), the determination result is set to be off (other than the jackpot) (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A4008). When the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909a, A3909b) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3107 of the special figure hold information determination process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure variation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In the present embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the large hit random number is also used for determining the small hit, but it is also possible to provide an original small hit random number.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4106), and ends the small hit determination process. ..

Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game. (A4102). Then, when the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4102 is “Y”), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 variable display game is set (A4103). On the other hand, when the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4104).

When the small hit upper limit determination value is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (A4105). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4105 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A4106). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4105 is "N"), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4107). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

FIG. 24 shows the jackpot probability (probability that the determination result becomes a jackpot), the small hit probability (probability that the determination result becomes a small hit), and the miss probability (the determination result becomes a miss) by the above-mentioned jackpot determination process and the small hit determination process. Probability) is shown for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. FIG. 24 (a) shows the probability in the low probability state, and FIG. 24 (b) shows the probability in the high probability state.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability (big hit occurrence probability) and the small hit probability (small hit occurrence probability) are higher in the high probability state than in the low probability state. The small hit probability (small hit occurrence probability) may be the same in the high probability state and the low probability state. The probability of loss (probability of occurrence of loss) is lower in the high probability state than in the low probability state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the missed probability are common to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, but the small hit probability is the special figure 1 variable display game. , The special figure 2 variable display game may be lower, and the probability of loss may be higher in the special figure 1 variable display game than in the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only the probability variation symbol, and after the jackpot state (special game state) ends, the probability variation state (probability variation state) is reached without exception, and the probability variation inrush rate is 100%. Further, the high probability state continues until a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of the variable display game starts after the end of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which a low probability state (with normal power support (time saving state) or without normal power support) is set after the end of the big hit state (special game state).

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3704) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4401). When it is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A4401 is "N"), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (A4402). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4403).

Here, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of reach, and the second half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after the reach state is reached, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4404), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4404 is "N"). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A4405).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the game control device 100 uses a special figure in the latter half offset data in order to distribute the latter half variation according to the number of reserved special figures 1. The value is updated by adding 1 hold number (A4406), and the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number (A4407). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (in the case of a miss) (the result of A4405 is "N"), the process of step A4406 is not performed, and the special figure 1 hold number is added only to the first half offset data. Convert the value (A4407).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4404 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not perform the processing of steps A4405-A4407, and the first half offset data and the second half offset acquired in step A4403. The process proceeds to step A4412 without updating or converting the data.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is in a high probability state (the result of A4401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4408). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4408 is "N"), the first half offset data for the miss / small hit of the special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4409), and the processing of step A4411 Move to. When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4408 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special figure 1 at the time of high probability is set (A4410). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A4411). As a result, in the high probability state, the special figure 1 variation display game becomes long-term variation (long variation). In the low probability state, since the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not set, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has a short-time fluctuation (long-term fluctuation) as compared with the long-term fluctuation (long-term fluctuation). (Short fluctuation) tends to occur.

After step A4404, A4407, or A4411, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4412), and saves the second half offset data (variable distribution). The information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4413), and the special figure 1 information setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3804) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A4501). In the case of a high probability state (the result of A4501 is "N"), the fluctuation pattern selection information table is set (A4502). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4503). The first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the high probability state (in the low probability state) (the result of A4501 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (A4504). .. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4504 is "N"), set the first half offset data for the miss / small hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability (A4505), and process in step A4507. Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4504 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4506). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4507). As a result, in the low probability state, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes long-term variation (long variation). In the high probability state, since the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a short-time fluctuation (long-term fluctuation) as compared with the long-term fluctuation (long-term fluctuation). (Short fluctuation) tends to occur.

After step A4503 or A4507, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4508), and stores the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2). The data is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4509), and the special figure 2 information setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3706) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601), acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4602), and prepares the variable pattern random number of FIG. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4603).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A4604). If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (the result of A4604 is "Y"), the 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605), and the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604 is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606).

The structure of the latter half variable group table is different for hit and miss, and the random number for distribution is 1 byte size for hit and 2 byte size for miss. For the hit, the size is set to 1 byte to save the data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605 or A4606, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution (A4607). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609). .. Then, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (A4610). By the above processing, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4616), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. By the above processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3806) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process of the special figure 2.

The game control device 100 first sets the latter half variable selection address table (A4701), and acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variable selection table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4702). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4703), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4704). Then, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (A4705). By the above processing, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4706), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4707). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4708). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 (A4709), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4710).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4711), and ends the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. By the above processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3707, A3807) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5001). When information is being set for the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special figure 1 used is cleared (A5002). ). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5001 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the random numbers of the variable pattern random numbers 2 to 3 of the special figure 2 used are being set. Clear the storage area (A5003).

After steps A5002 and A5003, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5004) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5005). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5006), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5007).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5008), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5009). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5010). If the information is not set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5010 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the long fluctuation (long-term fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not to start (A5011).

When the game control device 100 does not start the length variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5011 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5012), and the special figure 2 2 When the long variation of the variable display game is started (the result of A5011 is “Y”), 2 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5013).

For example, when a timer of 20000 msec (20 seconds) is set by saving the above-mentioned added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions of 2 times is saved, the timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2) The timer is subtracted in the game processing (FIG. 16) (A3303), and when the time is up (the result of A3304 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3306), and the timer for length variation is added to the game processing timer. The value of 20000 ms (20 seconds) is set. As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game of long variation can have a long variation time of 20000 msec + (20,000 msec × 2) = 1 minute.

The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuations saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5009. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5010 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5014 without setting the number of times the timer is repeated.

After steps A5010, A5012, and A5013, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5014), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5015). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variable command as the effect command is executed (A5016).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5017). When information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "Y"), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by -1 (A5018), and the contents of the random number storage area related to the special figure 1 variable display game. (A5019) and clear the free space after the shift (A5020). If the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5017 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the special figure 2 hold number is updated by -1 (A5021). Special Figure 2 The contents of the random number storage area related to the fluctuation display game are shifted (A5022), the free area after the shift is cleared (A5023), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set the detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are mentioned, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (A3717, A3808) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the high probability fluctuation number update process. In the high-probability fluctuation count update process, the number of fluctuations in the special figure fluctuation display game starting in the high-probability state (here, the high-probability fluctuation count as the remaining number of fluctuations) is updated and managed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (A5101). If it is not in the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state) (the result of A5101 is "N"), the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated.

If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the low probability state is set (the low probability state can be set by the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting process described later). That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, not only the special figure 1 variable display game but also the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in a low probability state, and when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2 variable display game is special. FIG. 2 Not only the variable display game but also the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in a low probability state. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state. It may be executed.

When the game control device 100 is in the high probability state (the result of A5101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the high probability fluctuation number of times indicating the remaining number of times of the special figure variation display game starting in the high probability state by -1 (1). Only subtract) (A5102). The initial value of the high-probability fluctuation number is the number of fluctuations in which the high-probability state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 50 times (special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process described later). ). Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, the number of high probability fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (A5103). When the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (the result of A5103 is "N"), that is, when the high probability state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5103 is "Y"), the signal related to the high-probability end (off-data of two jackpot signals) is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5104). Further, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A5105). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation. This is the off-data of the time reduction status signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the low probability in the game state display number area of the RWM (A5106), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A5106). A5107), the high-probability final change flag corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that starts the change is set (A5108), and the high-probability change number update process is completed.

The high-probability final fluctuation flag is information for indicating that the fluctuation is started during the high probability even if the probability is low. In the high-probability final fluctuation (high-probability final fluctuation), if the fluctuation is not reduced to a low probability immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the winning judgment by the start opening winning during this final fluctuation will be performed with a high probability. Therefore, the hit probability is set to a low probability by the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag at the start of the fluctuation of the high probability final fluctuation. Therefore, a high-probability final fluctuation flag is set and used to determine whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is present (for example, in steps A3515, A3608, A3709, etc.). Further, the high-probability final fluctuation flag also includes information that can determine which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is the high-probability final fluctuation.

As described above, after the jackpot ends, the high probability state is maintained until the fluctuation display game of a predetermined number of times (initial value of the high probability fluctuation number, for example, 50 times) is started, and the high probability fluctuation number = 0 and the predetermined number of times. When the eye fluctuation display game (high probability final fluctuation) is started, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set, the time saving state ends with the low probability state, and the high probability final fluctuation flag is further set. Is set.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variable processing (A3209) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special FIG.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determination output times by +1 (A5301). The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process described later. Next, the decorative special figure 1 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game to be started has a high probability final variation (high probability final variation) (A5306). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process, it can be determined that the high-probability final fluctuation has occurred. When the special figure 1 variation display game to be started has a high probability final variation (the result of A5306 is "Y"), the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is set as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of special figure 1. Set the corresponding display time (A5307). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 1, 2000 msec if it is a big hit symbol of special figure 1, and 136 msec if it is a small hit symbol of special figure 1. is there.

The game control device 100 sets the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation as the display time of the special figure 1 when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is not the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5306 is “N”). (A5308). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is 7000 msec.

After steps A5307 and A5308, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A5309). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5309 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is stored in the special figure 1 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A5309 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also). It is determined whether or not (A5310). If the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5310 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5320. When the special figure 2 is also changing (the result of the special figure 2 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the processing during the display of the special figure 2 described later is being executed (A5311).

When the process being displayed in Special Figure 2 is being executed (the result of A5311 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5313. When the special figure 2 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5311 is “N”), the number of symbol confirmation outputs is updated by +1 (A5312). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set (A5313) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5314). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3303), so that it is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 2 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the off-design command of the decorative special figure 2 as an effect command (A5315), and executes the effect command setting process (A5316). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5317), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5318). After that, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5319).

By the processing of steps A5313 to A5319, the deviation result of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special figure 2 (end of special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 2), when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 2 variable display game Will be forcibly terminated (forced termination) as a result of the loss.

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5009) is timed up (A3204). Since the result is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5320). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (A5321). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5321 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is displayed in special figure 1. Load from the stop symbol save area and save in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a small hit (when the result is a big hit) (the result of A5321 is "N"), the game control device 100 has the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5322).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5323). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5324). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5325) for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed, and the special figure 1 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, for example, “2” is set as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 1 display process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during the change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variable processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special FIG.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determination output times by +1 (A5401). The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process described later. Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5403). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game to be started has a high probability final variation (high probability final variation) (A5406). If the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set in step A5108 of the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process, it can be determined that the high-probability final fluctuation has occurred. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is not a high-probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is "N"), the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 corresponds to the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of special figure 2. Set the display time to be displayed (A5407). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 2, 600 msec if it is a big hit symbol of special figure 2, and 600 msec if it is a small hit symbol of special figure 2. is there. In addition, the display time of the out-of-order symbol, the big hit symbol, and the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started has a high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5406 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation as the display time of the special figure 2. (A5408). For example, the display time at the time of high probability final fluctuation is 7000 msec.

After steps A5407 and A5408, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (A5409). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of alignment (the result of A5410 is "N"), the game control device 100 also determines whether the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also running). (A5410). If the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5410 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5420. When the special figure 1 is also changing (the result of A5410 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the process during display of the special figure 1 described later is being executed (A5411).

When the process being displayed in Special Figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5411 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5413. When the special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5411 is "N"), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (A5412). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set (A5413) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5414). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3203), so that it is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the off-design command of the decorative special figure 1 as an effect command (A5415), and executes the effect command setting process (A5416). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5417), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5418). After that, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5419).

By the processing of steps A5413 to A5419, the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special figure 1 (end of special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit or small hit), the special figure 1 variable display game Will forcibly end the fluctuation (end of execution) as a result of the loss.

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3304 and A3305). Is executed in "Y"), so that when the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5420). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5421). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5421 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is displayed in special figure 2. Load from the stop symbol save area and save in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result is a big hit) (the result of A5421 is "N"), the game control device 100 has the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5422).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5423). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5424). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5425) for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed, and the special figure 2 changing process is terminated. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, for example, “2” is set as the process number in order to shift to the special figure 2 display process, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (A5419) in the special figure 2 changing process will be described. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 1. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated by hitting the special figure 2 variable display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets "2" as the processing number (A5601a) in order to shift to the processing during display of the special figure 1, saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5602a), and specially. The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603a). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A5604a). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605a), clears the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (A5606a), and special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area. (A5607a). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (A5608a), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A5609a). Subsequently, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (A5610a), and the stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5611a). By the above processing, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 becomes a fluctuation stop (variation end) with the out-of-order stop symbol.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (A5319) in the special figure 1 changing process will be described. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process transition setting process 2 during display of the special figure 2. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, information is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated by hitting the special figure 1 variable display game.

First, the game control device 100 sets "2" as the processing number (A5601b) in order to shift to the processing during display of the special figure 2, saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5602b), and specially. The signal relating to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (A5603b). Subsequently, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A5604b). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol pattern in the stop symbol pattern area (A5605b), clears the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A5606b), and special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area. (A5607b). Further, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A5608b), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A5609b). Subsequently, the special figure 2 stop symbol save area is cleared (A5610b), and the stop symbol number (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5611b). By the above processing, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a fluctuation stop (variation end) with the out-of-order stop symbol.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special drawing 1 normal processing (A6701), and saves the processing number in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (A6702). Then, the signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 1 big hit signal and the off data of 3 big hit signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A6703), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (output from the big hit). (Continuous output of 2 big hit signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A6704).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6705). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot is, for example, off-data of the signal during operation of the condition device, off-data of the signal during operation of the continuous operation device of the accessory, and off-data of the signal per special symbol. Subsequently, the signal relating to the start of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & time reduction are, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal. .. After that, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the high probability in the game state display number area (A6708), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6709), and round LED pointer. Save the turn-off number in the area (A6710). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6711), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6712), and the special figure status Clear the area (A6713)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit state (A6714). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the jackpot ends, it becomes a high probability state and also a time saving state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability fluctuation number is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region for holding the high probability fluctuation number (A6715). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6716).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6717), and ends the special figure 1 big hit end process. This special figure 2 game wait time value is for delaying the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) at the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 6). It is set to. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec (that is, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle.

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1310 in FIG. 6) that is performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1310 in FIG. 6) in which the special figure 1 jackpot end process is executed ( In A1311) of FIG. 6, since the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variation display game starts (starts within the timer interrupt process of this time), the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a problem because it starts first. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, it remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed in the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1 normal processing during special figure 1 game processing).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt cycle (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process). This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to 0 (the result of A3304 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game. (Special figure 2 during game processing, special figure 2 normal processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the jackpot state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure). 2) If the game processing) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing at the same time. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a missed symbol (forced termination or originally not changed).

If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started before the special figure 1 variable display game after the jackpot state ends, the process of step A6717 is omitted. FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game weight time value.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3317) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing.

First, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing of the special figure 2 (A6801), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6802). Then, the signal related to the end of the big hit (off data of 1 big hit signal and the off data of 3 big hit signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A6803), and the signal related to the start of high probability & time saving (output from the big hit). (Continuous output of 2 big hit signals) is saved in the external information output data area (A6804).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6805). The signal relating to the end of the jackpot is, for example, off-data of the signal for operating the condition device, off-data of the signal for operating the continuous operation device of the accessory, and off-data of the signal for hitting the special symbol 2. Subsequently, the signal relating to the start of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6806). Here, the signals related to the start of high probability & time reduction are, for example, a special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a special symbol 2 high probability state signal, a special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal. .. After that, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6807).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number in the game state display number area with a high probability (A6808), saves the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (A6809), and round LED pointer. Save the turn-off number in the area (A6810). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6811), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6812), and the special figure status Clear the area (A6813)

Next, the game control device 100 saves the high probability flag in the special figure game mode flag area in order to set the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit state (A6814). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol is only a probability variation symbol, and after the jackpot ends, it becomes a high probability state and also a time saving state. Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 50 times) of the high probability fluctuation number is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region for holding the high probability fluctuation number (A6815). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6816).

It is not necessary to set the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0. In the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change. (Inside the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing), and if the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. Because it can be done.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets “0” as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A7201), and saves the processing number in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (A7202). Next, the signal related to the end of the small hit (special symbol 1 small hit signal off data) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7203), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7204). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7205), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7206).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A7207). In the case of a high probability state (the result of A7207 is "Y"), the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210). When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A7207 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7208), and the game state display number 2 area is saved. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7209), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A7210).

Here, for the same reason as step A6717 of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing (FIG. 34), 8 msec (2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle, is set. Special figure 2 The game weight time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. As a result, in the next timer interrupt processing after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure). 2) If the game processing) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing at the same time.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets “0” as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing in the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Next, the signal related to the end of the small hit (special symbol 2 small hit signal off data) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Then (A7304), the flag is saved during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the lower prize opening (A7305). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7306), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7307).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit probability is in a high probability state (A7308). In the case of a high probability state (the result of A7308 is "Y"), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. When it is not in the high probability state (the result of A7308 is "N"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7309), and the game state display number 2 area is saved. The number in the left-handed state is saved (A7310), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed.

For the same reason as in the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 35), it is not necessary to set the game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (A1312) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure game processing. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7401). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general electric winning switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7402).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the normal game processing timer is not 0 (A7403). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7404).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7404 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is set to the normal figure game processing number. The general diagram game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7405).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game process number of the game based on the set table of the game sequence of the game (A7406). Then, a subroutine call is made based on the Fuzu game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the Fuzu game processing number is executed (A7407).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7407, the game control device 100 monitors the fluctuation start of the normal map variation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the normal map variation display game, sets the effect, and sets the effect. Performs normal processing (A7408), which sets information necessary for processing during fluctuations in the normal map. For example, in the normal map processing, when the normal map hold (memory for starting the normal map, input of the gate switch 34a) occurs, the normal map fluctuation time is set and saved in the normal map game processing timer area to change the normal map. Set "1" as the processing number for shifting to the intermediate processing, and save it in the normal map game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "1" in step A7407, the game control device 100 executes the normal map changing process for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display process (the normal map changing process). A7409). For example, in the normal map variable processing, the normal map display time is set, saved in the normal map game processing timer area, and set to "2" as the processing number for shifting to the normal map display process. Save to the number area.

Further, in the game control device 100, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7407, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal power according to whether or not the time is shortened. The normal map display processing is executed (A7410), in which the opening time is set, the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per-game processing is set, and the like. For example, in the normal map display process, if the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, the normal power release time is set, saved in the normal map game processing timer area, and the process shifts to the normal map hit process. Set it to "3" as the processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area. If the result of the normal map variation display game is different, set it to "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal map normal processing, and save it in the normal map game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "3" in step A7407, the game control device 100 normally continues the processing during the normal drawing or sets the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing. The middle process per figure is executed (A7411). For example, in the normal processing per figure, after continuously executing the drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, the normal electric remaining ball processing time is set and the normal figure game processing timer area. Save to, set to "4" as the processing number for shifting to the solenoid remaining ball processing, and save in the solenoid game processing number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "4" in step A7407, the game control device 100 executes the normal electric remaining ball processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing (A7412). ). For example, in the Fuden remaining ball processing, the Fuzu ending time is set, saved in the Fuzu game processing timer area, and set to "5" as the processing number for shifting to the Fuzu per end processing. Save to the number area.

Further, when the game processing number is "5" in step A7407, the game control device 100 executes the normal drawing end processing for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (A7408). (A7413). For example, in the normal figure per end process, the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process is set to "0" and saved in the normal figure game process number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal map fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal map display 58 (A7414). After that, the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 58 is executed (A7415), and the normal symbol game process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 executes the processes after step A7414 when the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7404 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7401 in the normal map game process shown in FIG. 38.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7501). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7501 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state should be right-handed (A7502). The right-handed gaming state (predetermined gaming state) is a big hit state, a small hit state, a probability change state, and a time saving state (general electric support state). When the game state should be right-handed (the result of A7502 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7505. When the game state should be left-handed (normal game state) (the result of A7502 is "N"), the left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7503), and the effect command setting process is performed. Execute (A7504). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes a left-handed instruction notification (warning) instructing the left-handed player by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the number of reserved normal figures and determines whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7505). When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved regular figures by +1 (A7506), and corresponds to the number of reserved regular figures after the update. The address of the random number storage area is calculated (A7507). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (A7508), the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7509), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

On the other hand, when the game control device 100 has no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7501 is "N"), or when it is determined that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A7505 is "N"). N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of magnet fraud monitoring processing. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set.

First, in the game control device 100, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not the magnetometer is detected (A7601).

When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A7601 is "Y"), that is, when the game control device 100 detects abnormal magnetism, the game control device 100 sets the magnet fraud monitoring timer to time the abnormal magnetism detection period by +1. It is updated (A7602) and it is determined whether or not the timer has timed up (A7603).

The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A7603 is "Y"), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A7604), the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A7605).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command as an effect command (A7606), and prepares a magnet fraud generation flag indicating that a magnet fraud has occurred as a magnet fraud flag (A7607). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet illegal flag matches the value in the magnet illegal flag region (A7613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not turned on (the result of A7601 is "N"), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected. (A7608). Then, if the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A7609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A7610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (the result of A7603 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A7609.

The game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7610 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up.

Further, the game control device 100 is in the case where the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7610 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, and the fraud notification period Is completed, or if the unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for ending the magnet illegal notification is prepared as an effect command (A7611).

Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (A7612), and determines whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (A7613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (the result of A7613 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet invalid flag does not match the value of the magnet invalid flag area (the result of A7613 is "N"), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (A7614), and the effect command is set. The process is executed (A7615). After that, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1315) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start and end of fraudulent notification are set.

First, the game control device 100 turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121, that is, It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A7701). When the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A7701 is "Y"), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (for example, 60 seconds). A7702).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a command for notifying the board radio wave fraud as an effect command (A7703), and prepares a board radio wave fraud generation flag indicating that the board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7704). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave illegal flag matches the value in the board radio wave illegal flag area (A7709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not turned on (the result of A7701 is "N"), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 defines a radio wave fraud notification timer. If is not 0, -1 is updated (A7705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A7706). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A7706 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

Further, the game control device 100 is in the case where the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A7706 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, and the fraud notification period Is completed, or if the illegal notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for ending the radio wave illegal notification is prepared as an effect command (A7707). Further, a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A7708), and it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A7709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A7709 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A7709 is "N"), the prepared board radio wave illegal flag is saved in the board radio wave illegal flag area (A7710), and the effect command setting process is executed (A7711). After that, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Modified example of control of game control device]
A modified example of the control (processing) of the game control device will be described below. The configuration other than that described below is the same as the above-mentioned control (processing) of the game control device.

In the above control processing (FIGS. 31, 32, etc.), during the fluctuation of one special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game or special figure 2 variation display game), the other special figure variation display game When (special figure 2 variable display game or special figure 1 variable display game) results in a hit result (big hit or small hit), one of the special figure variable display games is forcibly terminated (forced termination) with a missed result. However, as shown in the following modification, in this case, regarding the one special figure fluctuation display game, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the timer is interrupted and the game result is derived (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number). It is also possible to postpone and restart one of the interrupted special figure variation display games after the end of the hit operation related to the other special figure variation display game (after the end of the big hit state or the small hit state).

Even when the special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted, the change of the special symbol (identification information) itself apparently continues on the display device 41 and the special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52). (It is also possible to temporarily suspend the fluctuation of the special symbol during the suspension). If the fluctuation apparently continues, another concept can be said to extend the fluctuation time by the amount of the hit operation time (the time of the big hit state or the small hit state) related to the other special figure with respect to one special figure. ..

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing (Modified Example)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing (A1310) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing according to the modified example. FIG. 42 shows that the process of step S8200 is added to FIG. Since the processes from steps A3201 to A3220 in FIG. 42 have the same contents as those in FIG. 15, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8200). Special Figure 1 When the game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8200 is “N”), the processes from steps A3201 to A3220 are executed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8200 is “Y”), the game control device 100 changes the special figure 1 display 51 without performing the processes of steps A3201 to A3218. After preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for control (A3219), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3220), and then the special figure 1 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) that measures the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself is apparently continued on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing (Modified Example)]
A modified example of the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing (A1311) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing according to the modified example. FIG. 43 shows that the process of step S8300 is added to FIG. Since the processes from steps A3301 to A3323 in FIG. 43 have the same contents as those in FIG. 16, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8300). Special Figure 2 When the game interruption flag is not set (the result of S8300 is “N”), the processes from steps A3301 to A3323 are executed.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (the result of S8300 is “Y”), the game control device 100 changes the special figure 2 display 52 without performing the processes of steps A3301 to A3321. After preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for control (A3322), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A3323), and then the special figure 2 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted, the timing (update) of the variation time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for timing the variation time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself is apparently continued on the special diagram 2 display 52.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation (modification example)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 variable processing (A3209) in the special figure 1 game processing described above will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing 1 changing process according to the modified example. In FIG. 44, the processes of steps A5311 to A5319 of FIG. 31 are deleted, and the processes of steps S8411 to S8416 are added. Since the processes of steps A5301 to A5310 and steps A5320 to A5325 of FIG. 44 have the same contents as those of FIG. 31, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (A5309). The result is "N" and the result of A5310 is "Y"), and the processing of steps S8411 to S8416 interrupts the special figure 2 variable display game. When the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops fluctuating, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of sync and the special figure 2 is in fluctuation (S8411). .. If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of S8411 is “Y”), whether or not the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (special figure 2 game processing timer = 4 msec). Judgment (S8412). That is, based on the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game may end at the same timing as the special figure 1 variable display game (within the same interrupt processing). To do.

When the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 msec (the result of S8412 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the special figure 2 game processing immediately after the current special figure 1 game processing (this time timer interrupt). (Starting within the process), the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to 0, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be ended with a missed result. Therefore, in this case, since it is not necessary to interrupt the special figure 2 variable display game, the process proceeds to step A5324.

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not out of order (the result of S8411 is “N”), or when the remaining time of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 msec (the result of S8412 is “N”). ”), A special figure 2 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted is set (S8413). The special figure 2 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8300 described above. Subsequently, the decoration special figure 2 interruption command for instructing the interruption of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is prepared as an effect command (S8414), and the effect command setting process is executed (S8415). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 2 interruption command can set an effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (decrease by 4 msec) (S8416). This is because the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (S8413), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated by -1 (decrease by 4 msec) in the special figure 2 game processing immediately after the special figure 1 game processing this time. Here, instead, the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special figure 2 game processing timer is excessively increased by 4 msec when the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted.

After step S8416, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A5320 to A5325 as in FIG. 31. Note that, unlike FIG. 31, in the special figure 1 changing process according to the modified example, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation (modification example)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 variable processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing described above will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing 2 changing processing according to the modified example. In FIG. 45, the processes of steps A5411 to A5419 of FIG. 32 are deleted, and the processes of steps S8511 to S8513 are added. Since the processes of steps A5401 to A5410 and steps A5420 to A5425 of FIG. 45 have the same contents as those of FIG. 32, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of place (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) and that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A5409. The result is "N" and the result of A5410 is "Y"), and the processing of steps S8511 to S8513 interrupts the special figure 1 variable display game. When the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted.

The game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of alignment and the special figure 1 is changing. Set (S8511). The special figure 1 game interruption flag is used for the determination in step S8200 described above. Subsequently, the decoration special figure 1 interruption command for instructing the interruption of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is prepared as an effect command (S8512), and the effect command setting process is executed (S8513). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 interruption command can set an effect for interrupting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game.

After step S8513, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A5420 to A5325 in the same manner as in FIG. 32. In the special figure 2 changing process according to the modified example, unlike FIG. 32, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is not executed.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing (modification example)]
A modified example of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3214) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 46 shows that the processes of steps S8617 to S8621 are added to FIG. 34. Since the processes from steps A6701 to A6716 in FIG. 46 have the same contents as those in FIG. 34, the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6716, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (S8617). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8617 is "N"), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game interruption flag is cleared. 2 The game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8617 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8618) and execute the effect command setting process (S8619). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (S8620), and the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8621). , Special figure 1 The jackpot end processing is completed.

By clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is " N "). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted.

The process of step S8621 is the same as that of step A6717 of FIG. 34, and the special figure 2 game wait time value is the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game after the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game ends. (Resume) is set to be delayed at the time of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 6), and is 8 msec, which is twice the interrupt cycle. As a result, the timer interrupt process after the end of the jackpot state by the special figure 1 variable display game can restart the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 variable display game will start (restart) within the current timer interrupt process before the special figure 1 variable display game. If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started (restarted) before the special figure 1 variable display game after the jackpot state ends, the process of step A8621 is omitted. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the special figure 2 game wait time value.

Further, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variation display game is made at the time of the next timer interrupt processing based on the special figure 2 game wait time value, but the decorative special figure 2 restart command is set and transmitted first. This is because the processing cycle of the effect control device 300 is longer than that of the game control device 100, so that the time for one interrupt (4 msec) can be absorbed.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing (modification example)]
A modified example of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing (A3317) in the special figure 2 game processing described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 47 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8717 to S8720 to FIG. 35. Since the processes from steps A6801 to A6816 in FIG. 47 have the same contents as those in FIG. 35, the description thereof will be omitted.

After step A6816, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (S8717). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8717 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 1 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 1 game interruption flag is cleared. 2 End the big hit end process.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8717 is "Y"), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 1 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 1 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8718) and execute the effect command setting process (S8719). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area in which the special figure 2 game interruption flag can be set is cleared (S8720), and the special figure 2 big hit end process is terminated.

By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 2 game processing timer) that measures the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is restarted (the result of S8300 is " N "). That is, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, and the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted.

In the special figure 2 big hit end process, the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set. This is because the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can both be started (restarted) in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 6) even if there is no special figure 2 game wait time value.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing (modification example)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 1 small hit end process (A3218) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 1 small hit end processing according to a modified example. FIG. 48 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S8810 to S8814 to FIG. 36. Since the processes from steps A7201 to A7209 in FIG. 36 have the same contents as those in FIG. 36, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted when it is in a high probability state (the result of A7207 is “Y”) or after step A7209 (S8810). When the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8810 is "N"), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is set to the special figure 2 game. It is saved in the processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (the result of S8810 is “Y”), the game control device 100 produces a decorative special figure 2 restart command for instructing the restart of the special figure 2 variable display game. Prepare as a command (S8811) and execute the effect command setting process (S8812). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 2 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8813), the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (S8814), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is completed. To do. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the small hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted at the same time as the start of a new special figure 1 variable display game. The process of step S8814 is the same as that of step A7210 of FIG. Further, by clearing the special figure 2 game interruption flag area, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing (modification example)]
Next, a modified example of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3321) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing according to the modified example. FIG. 49 shows that the processes of steps S8911 to S8814 are added to FIG. 37. Since the processes from steps A7301 to A7210 in FIG. 37 have the same contents as those in FIG. 37, the description thereof will be omitted.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted when it is in a high probability state (the result of A7308 is “Y”) or after step A7310 (S8911). When the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, it can be determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of S8911 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated.

When the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (the result of S8911 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (S8912), and executes the effect command setting process. (S8913). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 2 variation display game. After that, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (S8914), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed. By clearing the special figure 1 game interruption flag area, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below. For convenience of explanation, the control of the effect control device 300 will be described as corresponding to the above-mentioned modification of the control of the game control device 100 (a configuration in which the interrupted special figure variation display game is restarted). In the case of the basic configuration (configuration that is not a modification) for forcibly terminating the special figure variation display game, the process related to the interruption and resumption of the special figure variation display game may be omitted.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the game machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B1001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B1002, B1003), and interrupts are permitted (B1004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B1005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B1006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B1007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B1008). The WDT is started with the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B1002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time has passed, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 (the signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B1009). Subsequently, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the player is executed (B1010). Then, a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number is executed (B1011), a received command received from the game control device 100 is analyzed, and a corresponding received command check process is executed (B1012). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. Further, a variable pending display change process for changing the display mode of the variable pending display (during digestion pending display) in the reserved digestion region is executed (B1013). The details of the pending display change processing during fluctuation will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect display editing process such as updating various data according to the contents displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B1014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B1015).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B1016). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is "N"), the processing of B1016 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B1016 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B1017). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B1018).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B1019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B1020). In the movable body control process, for example, the solenoid is driven to execute the accessory movement effect.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B1020 described above, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B1008. After that, the processes from B1008 to B1020 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the received command check process (B1012) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 50) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of command receptions is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing direct analysis in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y]), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later in FIG. 52. Further, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, in the process of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 51) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of command. To. Therefore, the upper and lower ranks of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command (the value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for commanding a variable pattern of the special decorative symbol, and there are variable commands (A5014 and A5015 in FIG. 29). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to an effect during a big hit or a small hit, and is, for example, a fanfare command, a round command, an interval command, an ending command, or the like. Then, when the MODE unit represents a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the hit command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead stop symbol command (A3111 in FIG. 14). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation command includes the above-mentioned look-ahead variation pattern command (A3115 in FIG. 14). Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. In addition, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is completed.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 52) described above will be described. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of the one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of the one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single-shot command process is performed. finish.

When the MODE unit does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated. If the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (when there is a special figure game interruption flag backed up in the RWM), the command at the time of power failure recovery is a special figure. 1 Suspended command (interrupted command) indicating that the variable display game is suspended or that the variable display game is suspended is included.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command when the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1305 is "N") (the result of B1305 is "N"). B1307). Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command process is terminated. The special figure 1 hold information setting process constitutes the first start memory display means, and the special figure 1 hold display 620a (first start memory display) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (first start memory, special figure 1 start memory). ) Is displayed on the first display unit 620 of the display device 41.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated. The special figure 2 hold information setting process constitutes the second start memory display means, and the special figure 2 hold display 630a (second start memory display) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (second start memory, special figure 2 start memory). ) Is displayed on the second display unit 630 of the display device 41.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command when the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"). (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE section represents an error / illegal / striking command. Judgment (B1315). As the error / illegal / striking command, for example, an illegal notification command (A7606, A7703), an illegal notification end command (A7611, A7707), a gate abnormal passage occurrence command (A2414), and a gate abnormal passage cancellation command (A2418). ), State off command (A2504), state on command (A2507), left-handed instruction notification command (A7503, etc.), right-handed instruction notification command (A2705, etc.). Then, when the MODE section represents an error / illegal system / striking command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error or fraud notification or a striking instruction notification (left-handed instruction notification, right-handed instruction notification) is reported. ) And the warning setting process for canceling them (B1316), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent an error / illegal system / striking command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE section represents a command for switching the effect mode. It is determined whether or not (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the command for stopping the symbol. (B1319). The commands for stopping the symbol include the decorative special figure 1 stop command and the decorative special figure 2 stop command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for stopping the symbol (the result of B1319 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command is normal (B1320). If the command is not normal (the result of B1320 is "N"), the one-shot command processing is terminated.

When the command is normal (the result of B1320 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 makes a stop setting for stopping the corresponding special figure (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) (B1321). Then, when all the special symbols (identification information) in the plurality of variable display areas of the display device 41 are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (B1322), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In addition, the game state flag is a flag that can indicate a state such as changing, big hit, small hit, and the like.

If the MODE unit does not represent a command for stopping the symbol (the result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command for suspending fluctuations. (B1323). The command for suspending the fluctuation is the above-mentioned decorative special figure 1 interruption command (S8512 in FIG. 45) and the decorative special figure 2 interruption command (S8414 in FIG. 44). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for suspending fluctuation (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the fluctuation suspension setting process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a command for resuming fluctuations when the MODE unit does not represent a command for suspending fluctuations (the result of B1323 is “N”). (B1325). The command for resuming the fluctuation is the above-mentioned decorative special figure 1 restart command (S8718 in FIG. 47) and the decorative special figure 2 restart command (S8618 in FIG. 46). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for suspending the fluctuation (the result of B1325 is “Y”), the fluctuation restart setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

Even if the command for interrupting the fluctuation is not received, if the hit command related to the production of the hit (big hit or small hit) of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game of one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is received, On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may automatically determine whether or not the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed, and perform the variation interruption setting process and the subsequent variation restart setting process.

[Fluctuating interruption setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the details of the fluctuation interruption setting process (B1324) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 53) described above will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the fluctuation interruption setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command for suspending fluctuation is a normal command (B1401). If the command is not normal (the result of B1401 is "N"), the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated. When the command is normal (the result of B1401 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command is received when the power is turned on (B1402). When the command is received when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is "Y"), the decoration special figure variation display game corresponds to the received command (decorative special figure 1 interruption command or decoration special figure 2 interruption command). The suspending flag of the decorative special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating that is being suspended is set (B1403).

When the effect control device 300 does not receive a command when the power is turned on (the result of B1402 is "N"), the design to be interrupted (decorative special figure 1 or decorative special figure 2) is changing. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the variable display game of the symbol to be interrupted is being executed (B1404). If the target symbol is not changing (the result of B1404 is "N"), the change interruption setting process is terminated. When the target symbol is changing (the result of B1404 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the received command for suspending the fluctuation is the decorative special figure 1 suspend command (B1405).

When the received command for suspending the variation is the decorative special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the interrupt variable display of the decorative special figure 1 (B1406). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special drawing 1 is greatly enlarged (main display, normal display) in the center, it is moved to a corner and reduced to a small size. A variable display for interruption may be set, or a variable display for interruption that is displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual may be set. Subsequently, the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 1 indicating that the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1407). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (B1408).

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1408 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (B1409). If the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1409 is "N"), the display device 41 or the like indicates the interruption of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. The display setting of the interruption effect is executed (B1410), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the low probability state (the result of B1408 is “N”), that is, in the high probability state, the effect of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, the display setting of the effect for interrupting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is not performed, and the variation interruption setting process is terminated. Further, when the result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1409 is "Y"), the display device 41 preferentially displays the big hit effect of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Special Figure 1 Fluctuation display The variable interruption setting process is terminated without setting the display of the game interruption effect.

On the other hand, when the received command for suspending the fluctuation is not the decorative special figure 1 interruption command (the result of B1405 is "N"), that is, when the decorative special figure 2 interruption command is received, the effect control device 300 has the decorative special figure 2 The fluctuation display for interruption is set (B1411). For example, on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, if the variable display of the decorative special figure 2 is greatly enlarged (main display, normal display) in the center, it is moved to a corner and reduced to a small size. A variable display for interruption may be set, or a variable display for interruption that is displayed in a state of higher transparency than usual may be set. Subsequently, the interruption flag of the decoration special figure 2 indicating that the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is being interrupted is set in the RAM or the like (B1412). Then, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (B1413).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the result of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit when it is not in the low probability state (the result of B1413 is “N”), that is, in the case of the high probability state (B1414). ). If the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B1414 is "N"), the display device 41 or the like indicates that the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. The display setting of the interruption effect is executed (B1415), and the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 is in a low probability state (the result of B1413 is “Y”), the effect of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially displayed on the display device 41, so that the decorative special figure 2 variation. The display setting for the interruption effect of the display game is not performed, and the fluctuation interruption setting process is terminated. Further, when the result of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B1414 is "Y"), the display device 41 preferentially displays the big hit effect of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display The variable interruption setting process is terminated without setting the display of the game interruption effect.

[Variation restart setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the fluctuation restart setting process (B1326) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 53) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the fluctuation restart setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command for resuming fluctuation is a normal command (B1501). If the command is not normal (the result of B1501 is "N"), the fluctuation restart setting process is terminated. When it is a normal command (the result of B1501 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the received command for resuming fluctuation is the decorative special figure 1 resuming command (B1502).

When the received command for resuming the fluctuation is the decoration special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 changes the decoration special figure 1 based on the suspended flag of the decoration special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the display game is interrupted (B1503). Decorative Special Figure 1 If the variable display game is not interrupted (the result of B1503 is "N"), the variable restart setting process ends.

When the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (the result of B1503 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the suspended flag of the decorative special figure 1 (B1504). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1505). The power failure recovery display is a display that suggests that the power failure has been restored or that processing is being performed after the power failure is restored. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1505 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart of the decoration special figure 1 for recovery according to the probability state (restart of the decoration special figure 1 variation display game for recovery) is set. (B1506). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1505 is "N"), the decoration special figure 1 variation display according to the probability state is set to restart (not for recovery) (B1507).

On the other hand, when the received command for resuming the fluctuation is not the decoration special figure 1 restart command (the result of B1502 is "N"), that is, when the decoration special figure 2 restart command is received, the effect control device 300 has the decoration special figure 2 Based on the suspended flag of, it is determined whether or not the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (B1508). Decorative Special Figure 2 If the variable display game is not interrupted (the result of B1508 is "N"), the variable restart setting process ends.

When the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (the result of B1508 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 clears the suspended flag of the decorative special figure 2 (B1509). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B1510). When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B1510 is "Y"), the fluctuation restart of the decoration special figure 2 for recovery according to the probability state (restart of the decoration special figure 2 variation display game for recovery) is set. (B1511). When the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B1510 is "N"), the decoration special figure 2 variation display according to the probability state is set to restart (not for recovery) (B1512).

Regarding the processing of steps B1506, B1507, B1511, and B1512, there is a possibility that the probability state has changed when the interruption of the decorative special figure variation display game is started and when it is resumed. Therefore, at the time of resumption, the display mode of the symbol differs depending on whether or not the target symbol is displayed with priority. For example, if the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during a low probability, the reduced symbol of the special figure 1 is interrupted in a state where the reduced symbol of the special figure 1 continues to fluctuate in the corner of the display device 41. Is restarted with a large priority displayed in the center of the display device 41. If there is a high probability / time saving state at the time of restart, restart with the reduced symbol (reduced display).

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 52) described above will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1215) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading variation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is being waited for (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and sets a look-ahead variation MODE command. Acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit corresponding to the MODE unit (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT section corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACTION section (ACT section) is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. When both the MODE section and ACT section after conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the MODE section and ACT section after conversion corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Save in the look-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Hold changes When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation is changed, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-internal look-ahead change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there are different types of reach for the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT section (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. .. For example, there are various types of normal reach, such as normal reach-1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is considered that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold that has occurred most recently is out of order (B1711). .. When the latest hold is a hit (the result of B1711 is "N"), the effect control device 300 calculates the total time until the change of the special figure change display game of the latest hold ends (B1712). The total time includes the display time of the stopped symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the other decorative special figure change display game will be interrupted at the end of the change of the latest hold special figure change display game (B1713). If the latest hold is the special figure 1 hold, the other decorative special figure variable display game is the decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, for example, if the other decorative special figure variation display game is not executed after the calculated total time, or if the other decorative special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the other decorative special figure variation display game is used. Judge not to interrupt.

When the effect control device 300 interrupts the other decorative special figure variation display game (the result of B1713 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is a plan to execute the look-ahead effect for the suspension hold (B1714). The suspension hold is a hold corresponding to the decorative special figure variation display game to be suspended. In addition, the fact that there is an execution schedule includes that the look-ahead effect is being executed. When there is an execution schedule of the look-ahead effect for the interruption hold (the result of B1714 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect of the break hold is a hold change notice (B1715).

When the pre-reading effect of suspension hold is not a hold change notice (the result of B1715 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the effect replacement for the pre-reading effect of suspension hold is in time (B1716). If the look-ahead effect has already progressed and it is impossible to forcibly end it, it is determined that the effect replacement is not in time (no replacement is performed). When the effect replacement is in time (the result of B1716 is "Y"), the converted command is saved in the latest hold information and the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the number of holds (B1717) so that the effect can be replaced.

The effect control device 300 suspends the suspension when the latest hold is out of order (the result of B1711 is "Y") and when the other decorative special figure variation display game is not interrupted (the result of B1713 is "N"). If there is no plan to execute the look-ahead effect for (B1714 result is "N"), if the interrupt hold look-ahead effect is a hold change notice (B1715 result is "Y"), the effect replacement is not in time (B1716). The result is "N"), and the process directly proceeds to the process of step B1718 without replacing the effect.

Next, the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the look-ahead variation command area (B1718), and executes the look-ahead lottery process regarding the look-ahead effect of the latest hold (B1719). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold pre-reading notice effect occurs (B1720). When the latest pending look-ahead notice effect occurs (the result of B1720 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the generated look-ahead notice effect is an effect that starts immediately (B1721). The production that starts immediately includes, for example, a pending change notice. When the pre-reading notice effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1721 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1722). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the latest hold pre-reading notice effect does not occur (the result of B1720 is "N"), or when the generated pre-reading notice effect does not start immediately (the result of B1721 is "N"). ), As it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 52) described above will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In this embodiment, the symbol types are the above-mentioned outlier symbol, 2R probability variation symbol, 4R probability variation symbol, 8R probability variation symbol, and 16R probability variation symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the details of the variable command process (B1206) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 52) described above will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undecided (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in performing the effect, such as when a symbol-based command of a probabilistic symbol is received even though a variable-system command that is out of alignment is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the variable system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variable pattern type from the variable system command (variable command) (B1904), and performs the effect during the change. The variable effect setting process to be set is executed (B1905). In addition, there are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 59) described above will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach variation (B2001 result is "Y"), set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, and production mode (B2002), and change command (B2002). The address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

The effect control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special symbol type, the effect mode, and the symbol type when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the variation pattern type is reach variation. The advance notice distribution group address table is set (B2004), and the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variable command (variable command) and the variable pattern type is acquired (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type (B2007), and set the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section of the variable command. It is acquired (B2008), and a lottery for notice that appears during the latter half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). After that, the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is concretely determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the power failure recovery display (recovery screen) is being displayed on the display device 41 (B2013). If the power failure recovery display is not being displayed (the result of B2013 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B2015. When the power failure recovery display is being displayed (the result of B2013 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation is related to the symbol that is the main display (B2014). In addition, this variation is a decorative special figure variation display game executed by this variation system command. For example, when the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 is greatly enlarged (normal display) at the center of the display device 41, the special figure 1 is the main display.

When the effect control device 300 relates to a symbol whose main display is the current variation (the result of B2014 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the display of the variation effect (B2015) and sets the display of the advance notice effect. (B2016). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B2017).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type (B2018). Here, the effect control device 300 sets the display related to the hold shift that changes the display position of the hold display to the adjacent display position, and displays the variable hold display (digestion hold display) that occurs at the time of the hold shift. Display settings for color, size, shape, arrangement, etc.).

That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game based on the special figure 1 hold (first start memory) is started, the effect control device 300 is adjacent to the display position of each special figure 1 hold display 620a on the first display unit 620. Make display settings for the hold shift (see also FIG. 63) that changes to the display position of. Further, the effect control device 300 erases one special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the end of the first display unit 620 from the first display unit 620, and the special figure corresponding to the erased special figure 1 hold display 620a. 1 Set the display to display the changing hold display 620b (special figure 1 holding display during digestion) in the holding digestion area 640 (specific display unit, changing hold display area) in a predetermined manner (special figure 1 hold display 620a). Hold shift to hold digestion area 640). The special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the end of the first display unit 620 appears to move from the first display unit 620 to the hold digestion region 640. The special figure 1 variable display hold display 620b (first notification image, first notification display) notifies that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed.

Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game based on the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is started, the effect control device 300 is adjacent to the display position of each special figure 2 hold display 630a on the second display unit 630. Make display settings for the hold shift (see also FIG. 63) that moves to the display position of. Further, the effect control device 300 erases one special figure 2 hold display 630a located at the end of the second display unit 630 from the second display unit 630, and the special figure corresponding to the erased special figure 2 hold display 630a. 2 Set the display to display the changing hold display 630b (special figure 2 holding display during digestion) in the holding digestion area 640 (specific display unit, changing hold display area) in a predetermined manner (special figure 2 hold display 630a). Hold shift to hold digestion area 640). The special figure 2 hold display 630a located at the end of the second display unit 630 appears to move from the second display unit 630 to the hold digestion region 640. The special figure 2 variable display hold display 630b (second notification image, second notification display) notifies that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (B2019), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate in the display device 41. When there is (4th symbol), the display setting of the 4th symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by an LED (lamp display device 80) other than the display device 41 and the display device 41.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 is displaying the power failure recovery display (the result of B2013 is "Y") and the change this time is not related to the symbol whose main display is (the result of B2014 is "Y"). N "), that is, when the current variation is related to a symbol displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the display device 41, settings such as variation effect and advance notice effect are set so as not to perform a flashy effect (processing from B2015 to B2017). ) Is not performed, and the process proceeds to step B2018.

[Holding display change processing during change]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the variable pending display change process (B1013) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 50) will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the pending display change processing during change executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is in progress, that is, whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is in the running state (B2201). Whether or not the special figure 1 is changing can be determined from the special figure type (B1901) and the game state flag (B1906). When the special figure 1 is changing (the result of B2201 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing, that is, whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed. (B2202). When the special figure 1 is changing but the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of B2202 is "N"), the display mode of the holding display 620b during the change of the special figure 1 is maintained and set as it is ( B2203). The special figure 1 variable display hold display 620b is configured as a first notification image for notifying that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. Further, here, the pending display 630b during the change in Special Figure 2 is not displayed. In addition, it is also possible to change the display mode of the pending display 620b during special drawing 1 for the purpose of producing or the like.

When the special figure 1 fluctuation is not in progress (the result of B2201 is “N”), the effect control device 300 indicates whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation is in progress, that is, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed. Whether or not it is determined (B2204). Whether or not the special figure 2 is changing can be determined from the special figure type (B1901) and the game state flag (B1906). When the special figure 1 is not changing but the special figure 2 is changing (the result of B2204 is "Y"), the display mode of the holding display 630b during the change of the special figure 2 is maintained and set as it is ( B2205). The special figure 2 variable display hold display 630b is configured as a second notification image for notifying that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, here, since the special figure 1 is not changing, the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is not displayed. It should be noted that it is also possible to change the display mode of the pending display 630b during special drawing 2 for the purpose of producing or the like.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the change of the special figure 2 (the result of B2204 is "N"), the effect control device 300 is not in the change of the special figure 1. Not displayed (B2206).

When the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is changing (the result of B2202 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 is the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. (B2207), and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, is calculated (B2208). Since the total fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game can be known from the fluctuation command (variation command) or the fluctuation pattern type, if the elapsed time from the reception of the fluctuation command is subtracted from the total fluctuation time, the remaining fluctuation time is obtained. The fluctuation time can be calculated.

Next, the effect control device 300 changes and sets the display modes of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b according to the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time and the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time. (B2209). As a result, according to the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time and the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time, the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, and the entire changing hold display 680 (special figure 2) (1) A combination of the changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b) will be changed (see also FIGS. 65 and 67). Therefore, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 can be visually recognized.

[Display screen layout example]
62A and 62B are diagrams showing a layout example (display mode example) of the display screen of the display device 41.

In FIG. 62A (I), a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle area 610c) are provided in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and the first special symbol is provided in the left area 610a. In the right area 610b, the second special symbol is displayed in an enlarged display (main display, normal display), and in the middle area 610c, the third special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Similarly, in the variable display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, three decorative reduced symbols (special symbols smaller than the decorative special symbol) are variablely displayed (reduced display). The effect control device 300 can set the enlarged display and the reduced display of the variation of the decorative special symbol (decorative special figure) in, for example, step B2019 of the variation effect setting process.

In the normal game state (low probability state), as shown in FIG. 62A (I), the variable display of the decorative special symbol (decorative special figure 1) of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. Enlarged display (main display, normal display), special figure 2 variable display The variable display of the decorative special symbol (decorative special figure 2) of the game is reduced (sub-displayed) in the variable display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen. To. In the high probability state, on the contrary, as shown in FIG. 62B (III), the variable display of the decorative special symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is enlarged and displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and the special figure is displayed. 1 Variable display Game decoration The variable display of the special symbol may be reduced and displayed in the variable display area 611 in the lower left corner of the display screen.

When one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is in the reach state, the variable display of the one variable display game is enlarged and displayed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and the other. The variable display of the variable display game may be reduced and displayed in the variable display area 611 or the variable display area 615. Further, the variation display of one of the variation display games of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, which is stopped (finished) first, is enlarged and displayed in the variation display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and the other. The variable display of the variable display game may be reduced and displayed in the variable display area 611 or the variable display area 615. Further, when a movie-type reach effect is performed in the center of the display screen, a reduced display is performed in the variable display area 611 or the variable display area 615 instead of the enlarged display of the variable display game executed in the variable display area 610. May be done.

The special decorative symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special decorative symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game may have similar figures or may be completely different. When they are completely different, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be clearly distinguished, and the player is not confused.

Further, in FIG. 62A (II), the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are displayed in parallel in the variable display area 610 on the left side of the center of the display screen and the variable display area 616 on the right side of the center, respectively. Is displayed in. The variable display area 610 and the variable display area 616 may have the same size. In addition, the flow direction (scroll direction) of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is set in the vertical direction and the other in the horizontal direction, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure are set. 2 The variable display game may be easily distinguished.

The effect control device 300 is used for the operation of the effect button 25 (operation unit) by the player (input to the effect button switch 25a) in the effect button input process (B1009) and the hall / player setting mode process (B1010). Correspondingly, the display mode of the variable display game of FIG. 62A (I) or FIG. 62B (III) (by enlarged display and reduced display) and the display mode of the variable display game of FIG. 62A (II) (of the same size). You may switch between two displays).

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, a first display unit 620 (first hold display unit) for displaying the special figure 1 hold display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (first start storage), and a special figure 2 A second display unit 630 (second hold display unit) for displaying the special figure 2 hold display 630a corresponding to the hold (second start storage) is provided. Further, at the lower part of the display screen, between the first display unit 620 and the second display unit 630, the hold digestion area 640 capable of displaying the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and / or the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b. (Specific display unit, pending display area during change) is provided. The special figure 1 changing hold display 620b (first notification image) notifies that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed, and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b (second notification image) is a special figure. 2 Notifies that the variable display game is running. The special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is displayed on the first display unit 620 side, and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is displayed on the second display unit 630 side. Further, the areas corresponding to the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b may be referred to as a first notification unit and a second notification unit, respectively.

Since the reserved digestion area 640 (specific display unit) is provided between the first display unit 620 and the second display unit 630, the player can display the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and / or the special figure 2 changing hold display. It becomes easy to check the 630b and the special figure 1 hold display 620a and / or the special figure 2 hold display 630a at a time, and the occurrence status and digestion status of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold (based on the hold). You can check the execution status of the variable display game at the same time.

In FIG. 62A (II), the first display unit 620 that displays the special figure 1 hold display 620a faces the change display area 610 on the left side of the center that displays the special figure 1 change display game, and displays the special figure 2 hold display 630a. The second display unit 630 to be displayed faces the variable display area 616 on the right side of the center for displaying the special figure 2 variable display game. This makes it easier to check the occurrence status and digestion status (execution status of the variable display game based on the hold) of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold.

Further, the combination of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b becomes the changing hold display 680 having a unified shape as a whole. The variable display hold display 680 is a notification display (notification image) capable of notifying that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state. Since the variable display hold display 680 is a display corresponding to both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the player can simply look at the variable display hold display 680 for a moment to display the special figure 1 variable display. It is easy to recognize that both the game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state.

The changing hold display 680 includes a special figure 1 changing hold display 620b (first broadcast image) and a special figure 2 changing hold display 630b (second broadcast image) in association with each other. For example, the changing hold display 680 includes a display mode (form) in which the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b face each other and are combined (connected) or adjacent to each other, or the special figure 1 changing hold display. It has a display mode (form) in which one of the display 620b and the pending display 630b in FIG. 2 is included in the other. Therefore, the player can easily see the changing hold display 680 as compared with the case where the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b are not associated with each other, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 It is possible to immediately determine whether or not the variable display games are both running.

On one side (here, the left side) of the display screen of the display device 41, there is a special figure 1 hold number display 650 (first start memory number display) that displays the number of special figure 1 hold (first start memory). The special figure 2 hold number display 660 (second start memory number display) for displaying the number of special figure 2 hold (second start memory number) is displayed. The mode (color and shape) of the special figure 1 hold number display 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 may not overlap each other so as to be easily distinguished from each other.

Apart from the special figure 1 variable display hold display 620b, a first predetermined image 675 capable of notifying that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed is displayed facing the special figure 1 hold number display 650. Apart from the special figure 2 variable display hold display 630b, a second predetermined image 676 capable of notifying that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed is displayed facing the special figure 2 hold number display 660. Therefore, the player can simultaneously view the special figure 1 hold number display 650 and the first predetermined image 675, and can simultaneously confirm the occurrence status and the digestion status of the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660. And the second predetermined image 676 can be viewed at the same time, and the occurrence status and the digestion status of the special figure 2 hold can be confirmed at the same time.

For example, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" or a number "1" when the special figure 1 variable display game is running, but when the special figure 1 variable display game is not running. , Change to the symbol "x" or the number "0". Similarly, the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "○" or a number "1" when the special figure 2 variable display game is running, but when the special figure 2 variable display game is not running. Changes to the symbol "x" and the number "0". The first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 may not overlap each other in terms (color and shape) so that they can be easily distinguished from each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62B, the fourth special symbol 671 (fourth symbol) of the special figure 1 variable display game and the fourth special symbol 672 (fourth symbol) of the special figure 2 variable display game are displayed on the display device 41. In addition to being displayed by the lamp display device 80 (LED) outside the screen, it may be displayed in the display screen of the display device 41. As shown in FIG. 62B (III), the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner by alternately displaying the missed symbol and the jackpot symbol, and in the case of a missed symbol, it stops at the missed symbol, and in the case of a jackpot, it stops at the jackpot symbol. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 62B (IV), the fourth symbol may display three symbols in a variable manner, and may stop at the missed symbol in the case of a miss, and may stop at the jackpot symbol in the case of a big hit.

〔Screen transition〕
63A-63C are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order.

FIG. 63A (a) is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure 1 variable display game. In the variable display area 610, the out-of-order stop symbol of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed. In the variable display area 615, the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing), and in the reserved digestion area 640, only the special figure 2 variable display 630b is displayed. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game being executed (changing). It is a symbol "○" indicating that. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "4", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "3".

(A) is a display screen in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen at the timing of starting the special figure 1 variable display game as the main display. In the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 hold display 620a moves to the display position of the special figure 1 hold display 620a on the right side (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the right end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold digestion area 640 (hold shift). That is, the special figure 1 hold display 620a at the right end of the first display unit 620 is erased from the first display unit 620, and the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b corresponding to the erased special figure 1 hold display 620a is held and digested. Display at 640. The erased special figure 1 hold display 620a and the corresponding special figure 1 changing hold display 620b may have the same or similar shapes and the same color.

In the holding digestion region 640, a circular holding holding display 680 in which the special drawing 1 changing holding display 620b and the special drawing 2 changing holding display 630b are combined is displayed (B2018). The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the special figure 1 hold number “3” reduced by 1, and the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. It changes to.

It should be noted that, due to the effect control device 300, the special figure 1 hold display 620a of the first display unit 620 and the special figure 2 hold display 630a of the second display unit 630 are different in color from each other, and the special figure 1 in the hold digestion region 640 is changing. The hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b are also set to have different colors. Therefore, the player does not confuse the special figure 1 hold display 620a with the special figure 2 hold display 630a, and does not confuse the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b with the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b. In addition, one of the special figure 1 hold display 620a (shown in stripes) shows that the color is different from the other special figure 1 hold display 620a due to the hold change notice (pre-reading effect of B1722) and the degree of expectation is high. ing.

After that, in (c), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time) and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time) correspond to each other. , The display mode (form) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is changed (B2209). Here, since the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1, the area (area) of the holding display 630b during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is reduced in the circular holding display 680 during the change, and the special figure 1 The area (area) of the hold display 620b during fluctuation increases, indicating that the end (change stop) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is near. In addition, the effect control device 300 changes the ratio of the area (area) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b to the ratio of the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time and the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time. It may be set based on.

After that, in (d), the special figure 2 variable display game ends (variable stop), and the out-of-order stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in the variable display area 615. In the reserved digestion area 640, only the pending display 620b during the change in FIG. 1 is displayed. The second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped.

(E) is a display screen at the timing of starting the special figure 2 variable display game as a reduced display in the variable display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen. In the second display unit 630, each special figure 2 hold display 630a moves to the display position of the special figure 2 hold display 630a on the left side (hold shift). Further, the special figure 2 hold display 630a located at the left end of the second display unit 630 is moved from the second display unit 630 to the hold digestion area 640 (hold shift). That is, the special figure 2 hold display 630a at the left end of the second display unit 630 is erased from the second display unit 630, and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b corresponding to the erased special figure 2 hold display 630a is held and digested. Display at 640. It should be noted that the erased special figure 2 hold display 630a and the corresponding special figure 2 changing hold display 630b may have the same or similar shape and the same color.

In the holding digestion region 640, a circular holding holding display 680 in which the special drawing 1 changing holding display 620b and the special drawing 2 changing holding display 630b are combined is displayed (B2018). The special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the special figure 2 hold number “2” which is reduced by 1, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It changes to.

After that, in (f), the display modes (forms) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b are changed according to the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time and the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time. (B2209). Here, since the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2, the area (area) of the holding display 620b during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is reduced in the circular holding display 680 during the change. 2 The area (area) of the hold display 630b during change increases, indicating that the end (change stop) of the special figure 1 change display game is near.

After that, in FIG. 63B (G), the special figure 1 variable display game ends (variable stop), and the out-of-order stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in the variable display area 610. In the reserved digestion area 640, only the pending display 630b during the change in FIG. 2 is displayed. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.

(H) is a variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and is a display screen at the timing of starting the special figure 1 variable display game as the main display. Similar to (a), the hold shift is executed in the first display unit 620 and the hold digestion area 640. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the special figure 1 hold number “2” reduced by 1, and the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. It changes to.

After that, in (ke), as in (c), the area (area) of the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is reduced in the circular changing hold display 680, and the area (area) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is reduced. (Area) increases, indicating that the end (variation stop) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is near.

After that, in (a), in the variable display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the small hit result mode, and the small hit state occurs. Since the special figure 2 variable display game results in a small hit during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination) with the result of being missed. In the center of the display screen, after the display of the out-of-order stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game, a small hit state effect or the like is displayed. In the reserved digestion area 640, neither the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b nor the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is displayed (erased). The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. It is "x". In (ko), the situation in which the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit result mode is shown, but the situation in which the big hit result mode is also the same. Similarly, during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a small hit result or a big hit result, and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with a missed result (forced termination). ), Neither the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b nor the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is displayed (erased).

After that, in (S), the hold shift is executed in the first display unit 620 and the reserved digestion area 640, and the second display unit 630 and the hold digestion area 640. Then, the special figure 1 variable display game in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen and the special figure 2 variable display game in the variable display area 615 at the lower right corner of the display screen are started substantially at the same time. In the holding digestion region 640, a circular holding holding display 680 in which the special drawing 1 changing holding display 620b and the special drawing 2 changing holding display 630b are combined is displayed (B2018). Due to the hold shift, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (shown in stripes) at the right end of the first display unit 620 moves to the hold digestion area 640 while maintaining the color changed by the hold change notice, and the special figure 1 The variable pending display is 620b.

The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the special figure 1 hold number "1" reduced by 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the special figure 2 hold number "1" reduced by 1. To do. The first predetermined image 675 changes to the symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 indicates that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It changes to the symbol "○".

After that, in (shi), as in (f), since the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2, the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is displayed in the circular changing hold display 680. The area (area) of the special figure 2 is decreasing, and the area (area) of the holding display 630b during the change of the special figure 2 is increasing, indicating that the end (variation stop) of the special figure 1 variation display game is near.

FIG. 63C shows an example in which a small hit state of the special figure 2 variable display game occurs after (ke), the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, and restarted after the small hit state.

In (ko') of FIG. 63C, since the special figure 2 variable display game results in a small hit during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. Here, interruption means interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game (update of the special figure 1 game processing timer) by the special figure 1 game processing timer, and deriving the result of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is to postpone (Fig. 42). Resuming means resuming the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game (update of the special figure 1 game processing timer) by the special figure 1 game processing timer (FIGS. 48 and 42).

The fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game may be apparently continued by the reduced display in the variable display area 611 in the lower left corner of the display screen (B1406), or the special figure 1 variable display game in the variable display area 611. It is not necessary to display the fluctuation itself (it does not have to continue apparently). Further, in (ko'), the situation in which the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit result mode is shown, but the situation in which the big hit result mode is also the same.

In the hold digestion area 640, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is not displayed, but instead of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (interruption effect). As B1410), the pending display 620c (dotted line) of the special figure 1 is displayed. The special figure 1 suspended hold display 620c corresponds in shape to the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, but is displayed in a different manner from the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b by displaying it lightly (semi-transparent display). Will be done. Further, the first predetermined image 675 becomes a symbol “Δ” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, and the second predetermined image 676 indicates that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. The symbol is "x". Similarly, during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a small hit result or a big hit result and the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 is suspended. Similar to the hold display 620c, the special figure 2 suspended hold display suggesting that the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended may be displayed instead of the special figure 2 variable hold display 630b.

Then, in (sa'), the hold shift is executed in the second display unit 630 and the hold digestion area 640. The restart of the special figure 1 variable display game in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen and the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the variable display area 615 in the lower right corner of the display screen are executed substantially at the same time. In the holding digestion region 640, a circular holding holding display 680 in which the special drawing 1 changing holding display 620b and the special drawing 2 changing holding display 630b are combined is displayed (B2018).

The special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the special figure 1 hold number “1” which is reduced by 1, but the special figure 1 hold number display 650 is maintained and the special figure 2 hold number “2” is displayed. The first predetermined image 675 changes to the symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 indicates that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. It changes to the symbol "○".

After that, in (shi'), as in (f), since the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2, the special figure 1 changing hold display is displayed in the circular changing hold display 680. The area (area) of 620b decreases, and the area (area) of the pending display 630b during special figure 2 change increases, indicating that the end (change stop) of the special figure 1 variable display game is near.

[Display mode of pending display during fluctuation]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing display modes (color, size, shape, arrangement) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, the special drawing 2 changing hold display 630b, and the entire changing hold display 680. These display modes are set, for example, in step B2018 of FIG. In FIG. 64, the white part shows the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, and the black part shows the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b.

The display modes of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, and the entire changing hold display 680 are the jackpots of the special figure 1 variable display game and / or the special figure 2 variable display game. It changes according to the degree of expectation (expected value). As described above, the degree of expectation of the jackpot changes according to the reach system of the special figure variation display game (for example, no reach, normal reach, special 1 reach, special 2 reach, special 3 reach, premier reach). Therefore, the expected degree of jackpot can be known from the look-ahead variation command (A3115 look-ahead variation pattern command) or the variation pattern type (B1904) as a preliminary determination result. The degree of expectation of a big hit corresponds to the probability of becoming a big hit when the reach system is selected. In addition, the colors, sizes, shapes, and arrangements of FIGS. 64 (I), (II), (III), and (IV) can be appropriately combined according to the degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 64 (I), the colors of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b may be set according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. For example, the color of the special figure 1 variable display hold display 620b is blue when the expectation of the special figure 1 variable display game is "low", yellow when it is "medium", and red when it is "high". Set. For example, the color of the special figure 2 variable display hold display 630b is green when the expectation level of the special figure 2 variable display game is "low", brown when it is "medium", and gold when it is "high". Set.

The colors of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b are set so as not to overlap even if their expectations are different or the same. As a result, the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b can be distinguished even if the color changes according to the degree of expectation.

For example, if the special figure fluctuation display game has no reach or normal reach, the expectation level is treated as "low", and if the special reach (special 1 reach, special 2 reach, special 3 reach), the expectation level is "medium". In the case of premier reach and big hit, the degree of expectation may be treated as "high".

Further, the color change with respect to the degree of expectation in FIG. 64 (I) can also be applied to the hold change notice (look-ahead effect) of the special figure 1 hold display 620a and the special figure 2 hold display 630a before the change. That is, the color of the reserved display 620b during the change of the special figure 1 may be maintained the same as the color changed by the pending change notice of the corresponding special figure 1 hold display 620a. Further, the color of the reserved display 630b during the change of the special figure 2 may be maintained the same as the color changed by the pending change notice of the corresponding special figure 2 hold display 630a.

As shown in FIG. 64 (II), the size of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, and by extension, the size of the entire changing hold display 680, are expected to be a big hit. , May be set to be larger.

As shown in FIG. 64 (III), the shapes of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, and the shape of the entire changing hold display 680 are "low" and "low" of the expectation of the jackpot. It may be set for each of "medium" and "high".

For example, when the expectation of the jackpot is "low", a shape is set in which the left side of the circular variable hold display 680 is the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the right side is the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b. May be done. When the expectation of the jackpot is "medium", the inside of the circular variable holding display 680 is the circular special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, and the outside is the ring-shaped special figure 2 changing hold display 630b. (The shape in which the outer special figure 2 changing hold display 630b encloses the inner special figure 1 changing hold display 620b) may be set. When the expectation of the jackpot is "high", the shape is such that the inside of the star-shaped variable hold display 680 is a circular special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the outside is a special figure 2 changing hold display 630b. It may be set (the shape in which the outer special figure 2 changing hold display 630b encloses the inner special figure 1 changing hold display 620b).

As shown in FIG. 64 (IV), the arrangement of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b in the changing hold display 680 is "low", "medium", and "medium" of the expectation of the jackpot. It may be set for each "high".

For example, when the expectation of the jackpot is "low", an arrangement may be set in which the left side of the variable hold display 680 is the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the right side is the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b. .. When the expectation of the jackpot is "medium", an arrangement may be set in which the inside of the variable hold display 680 is set as the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the outside is set as the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b. When the expectation of the jackpot is "high", an arrangement may be set in which the lower side of the variable hold display 680 is the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the upper side is the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b.

The degree of expectation in FIGS. 64 (II), (III), and (IV) is one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the higher expectation). Alternatively, the expected degrees of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be added up or averaged.

As described above, the display modes of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, and the entire changing hold display 680 are set to the degree of expectation that the special figure 1 variable display game will be a big hit. Special Figure 2 It can be set according to at least one of the expectations that the variable display game will be a big hit. Then, these display modes can be set according to at least one of the determination result of the first pre-determination means for the first start memory and the determination result of the second pre-determination means for the second start memory. The first pre-determination means and the second pre-determination means are composed of a special figure reservation information determination process (FIG. 14) and / or a look-ahead variable command process (FIG. 57).

For this reason, there is continuity and relevance between the display modes of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, and the entire changing hold display 680 and the hold change notice (look-ahead effect). Does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Further, according to the display modes of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, and the entire changing hold display 680, the player can display the first change display game and the second change display. You can expect the result of the game and improve the fun of the game.

[Change in display mode of pending display during change 1]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a change in the display mode of the pending display during fluctuation in the reserved digestion region 640. The change in the display mode of the variable pending display is set, for example, in the variable pending display change process of FIG. 61. In this example, the overall size of the variable hold display 680 and the arrangement of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b do not change with respect to the remaining fluctuation time.

From (A-1) to (A-7) of FIG. 65, of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, the remaining change time of the corresponding special figure change display game is short. The case where the area of one side decreases is shown.

In (A-1) to (A-3), both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a fluctuating state, but the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure). 2 Remaining fluctuation time) is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time). Therefore, when the ratio of the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time / special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time) becomes small, the area (area) of the holding display 630b during the change of the special figure 2 Decreases. Since the overall size of the changing hold display 680 does not change, the area (area) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b increases by the decrease of the area (area) of the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b.

The variable display hold display 680 can notify that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state. Further, in the changing hold display 680, the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b (first notification image) and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b (second notification image) are connected so as to face each other in the left-right direction ( (Or adjacent to each other).

In (A-4), when the special figure 2 variable display game ends, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is deleted, and in (A-5), only the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. In the reserved digestion area 640, only the pending display 620b during special figure 1 change is displayed. Also in this case, the overall size and outer shape of the variable pending display 680 do not change. Note that (A-4) may be omitted, and the transition to (A-5) may be made at the end of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In (A-6) to (A-7), the special figure 2 variable display game is started by the hold shift, and both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a fluctuating state. Fig. 1 Remaining fluctuation time is shorter than Special Fig. 2 Remaining fluctuation time. Therefore, when the ratio of the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time / special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time) becomes small, the area (area) of the holding display 620b during the change of the special figure 1 Decreases. Since the overall size of the changing hold display 680 does not change, the area (area) of the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b increases by the decrease of the area (area) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b.

From (B-1) to (B-7) of FIG. 65, of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, the remaining change time of the corresponding special figure change display game is short. The case where one area increases is shown.

In (B-1) to (B-3), both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a fluctuating state, but the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure). 2 Remaining fluctuation time) is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time). Therefore, when the ratio of the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time / special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time) becomes small, the area (area) of the holding display 630b during the change of the special figure 2 Will increase. Since the overall size of the changing hold display 680 does not change, the area (area) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b decreases by the increase in the area (area) of the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b.

In (B-4), when the special figure 2 variable display game ends, the special figure 2 variable display 630b is deleted, and in (A-5), only the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed. In the reserved digestion area 640, only the pending display 620b during special figure 1 change is displayed. Also in this case, the overall size and outer shape of the variable pending display 680 do not change. Note that (B-4) may be omitted, and the game may shift to (B-5) at the end of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In (B-6) to (B-7), the special figure 2 variable display game is started by the hold shift, and both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a fluctuating state. Fig. 1 Remaining fluctuation time is shorter than Special Fig. 2 Remaining fluctuation time. Therefore, when the ratio of the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time / special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time) becomes small, the area (area) of the holding display 620b during the change of the special figure 1 Will increase. Since the overall size of the changing hold display 680 does not change, the area (area) of the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b decreases by the increase in the area (area) of the special figure 2 changing hold display 620b.

As described above, the area (area) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is the ratio of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time to the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time (that is, special figure 1). It is determined based on the remaining fluctuation time / special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time, or the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time / special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time). However, it is not limited to this, and for the sake of simplicity, the width (left and right width) in the changing direction of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is changed to the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time and the special figure 2 remaining. It may be decided based on the ratio of the fluctuation time.

Immediately after both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a fluctuating state, the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time and the special figure are set as the setting (initial setting) of step B2018 in FIG. 2 Regardless of the ratio of the remaining fluctuation time, the area (area) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b may be set to be the same. That is, the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b may be displayed in half with respect to the entire changing hold display 680. By doing so, it can be clearly seen that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a changing state.

Further, unlike FIG. 65, the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display are always displayed with respect to the entire changing hold display 680 without changing the display mode of the changing hold display. It is also possible to display 630b in half (predetermined area ratio) in a fixed manner. Further, it is possible to increase the player's expectation by stopping the change of the display mode of the pending display during the change during the reach state and making the remaining change time unknown.

FIG. 66 is a detailed view of the variable pending display 680. The changing hold display 680 is divided into a change area 680a, a special figure 1 fixed area 680b, and a special figure 2 fixed area 680c. The change area 680a is an area where the boundary 681 between the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b can be located. In the change region 680a, the boundary 681 moves according to the ratio of the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2.

The special figure 1 fixed area 680b is always an area in which a part or all of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is displayed, and is not an area in which the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is displayed. The special figure 2 fixed area 680c is always an area in which a part or all of the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is displayed, and is not a display area in which the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is displayed.

It should be noted that the special figure 1 fixed area 680b and the special figure 2 fixed area 680c may be eliminated, and the entire changing hold display 680 may be used as the changing area 680a. In this case, the area (area) or change of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b or the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is proportional to the ratio of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time and the special figure 2 remaining fluctuation time. The width in the direction (width on the left and right) can be determined.

[Change in display mode of pending display during change 2]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing another variation example of the display mode of the pending display during fluctuation in the reserved digestion region 640. The change in the display mode of the variable pending display is set, for example, in the variable pending display change process of FIG. 61. In this example, the overall size of the variable hold display 680 and the arrangement of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b change with respect to the remaining fluctuation time.

From (C-1) to (C-7) of FIG. 67, the area of the holding display 620b during the change of the special figure 1 changes according to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and the area of the holding display 630b during the change of the special figure 2 changes. 2 shows a case where is changed according to the remaining fluctuation time. For example, the area and the width of the change direction of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b become larger as the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 becomes longer, and the area and the width of the change direction of the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b are the special figures. 2 The longer the remaining fluctuation time, the larger the value.

The variable display hold display 680 can notify that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is in the variable pending display 680. 620b (first broadcast image) and special figure 2 variable pending display 630b (second broadcast image) are placed inside and outside (or outside and inside) so that they face each other and are connected (or adjacent). Associated.

In (C-1), only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and only the circular special figure 2 variable display 630b is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. The area of the pending display 630b during special figure 2 change is a size proportional to the remaining change time of special figure 2. The width (here, the radius) in the changing direction of the holding display 630b during special drawing 2 may be set to a length proportional to the remaining changing time of special drawing 2.

In (C-2), the special figure 1 variable display game starts, and the special figure 1 variable pending display 620b is displayed. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is added to the outside so as to wrap the inner special figure 2 changing hold display 630b.

However, since the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1, as shown in (C-3), the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b and the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b are immediately displayed. The arrangement is exchanged, and the ring-shaped special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is displayed on the outside, and the circular special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is displayed on the inside. The boundary 681 between the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is also circular.

The areas of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b directly indicate the special figure 1 remaining change time and the special figure 2 remaining change time, respectively, and the special figure 1 remaining change time. Special figure 2 The size is proportional to the remaining fluctuation time. The width (radius in this case) of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b in the changing direction is proportional to the remaining change time of special figure 1 and the remaining change time of special figure 2, respectively. You may do it anyway.

After that, in (C-4), both the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 decreased, and the areas of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b became smaller. Become. The overall size of the variable pending display 680 has also decreased. After that, in (C-5), the special figure 2 variable display game ends, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b disappears, and only the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is displayed.

After that, in (C-6), the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and the special figure 2 variable pending display 630b is displayed. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is added to the outside so as to wrap the inner special figure 1 changing hold display 620b.

However, since the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2, as shown in (C-7), the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b are immediately displayed. The arrangement is exchanged, and the ring-shaped special figure 1 changing hold display 620b is displayed on the outside, and the circular special figure 2 changing hold display 630b is displayed on the inside.

In FIG. 67, the size of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b, and by extension, the overall size of the changing hold display 680, and the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure. 2 Not only the arrangement of the changing hold display 630b is changed with time, but also the shapes of the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b and the overall shape of the changing hold display 680 are also changed. .. As a temporal shape change other than FIG. 67, it is also possible to change the special figure 1 changing hold display 620b and the special figure 2 changing hold display 630b into a character shape associated with each other as part of the production.

(Game machine according to the first embodiment)
The above-mentioned first embodiment includes the gaming machines shown in the following (1) to (8) and (1a) to (1c).

(1) An effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game for variable display of identification information on a display device (41) is provided, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result mode. In a game machine that can generate a special game state that can give the player a game value when
A first control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning to the first start winning opening),
A second control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the establishment of the second start condition (winning to the second start winning opening). Prepare,
It is possible to set both the first variation display game by the first control means and the second variation display game by the second control means in the running state.
The effect control means
When the first variable display game and the second variable display game are both running, it is possible to notify that both the first variable display game and the second variable display game are running. A game machine characterized in that a notification display (holding display during fluctuation 680) is displayed on a specific display unit (holding digestion area 640) of the display device.

(2) The effect control means is
A first notification image (special figure 1 changing hold display 620b) for notifying that the first variation display game is being executed, and a second notification image for notifying that the second variation display game is being executed. (Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Hold Display 630b) and can be displayed on the specific display unit (hold digestion area 640).
When both the first variable display game and the second variable display game are in the running state, the notification display (holding display during fluctuation 680) including the first notification image and the second notification image in an associative manner. ) Is displayed on the specific display unit (1). The gaming machine (FIGS. 65-67).

(3) The effect control means has a remaining fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game being executed (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time) and a remaining fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display game being executed (special figure 2). The gaming machine (FIG. 61) according to (2), wherein the modes of the first notification image and the second notification image in the notification display can be changed according to the remaining fluctuation time).

(4) A first start storage means (game control device 100) that stores the execution right of the first variation display game as a first start memory based on the establishment of the first start condition.
A second start storage means (game control device 100) that stores the execution right of the second variation display game as a second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition is provided.
The effect control means
A first start memory display means (B1310) that displays a first start memory display (special figure 1 hold display 620a) corresponding to the first start memory on the first display unit (620) of the display device.
A second start memory display means (B1312) for displaying a second start memory display (special drawing 2 hold display 630a) corresponding to the second start memory on the second display unit (630) of the display device is provided.
When the first variable display game based on the first start memory is started, the first start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is erased from the first display unit (620), and the erased said. The first broadcast image (620b) corresponding to the first start memory display is displayed on the specific display unit (reserved digestion area 640).
When the second variation display game based on the second start memory is started, the second start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is erased from the second display unit (630), and the erased said. The game machine (FIG. 63) according to (2), wherein the second broadcast image (630b) corresponding to the second start memory display is displayed on the specific display unit (reserved digestion area 640).

(5) The effect control means is characterized in that the specific display unit (reserved digestion region 640) is set between the first display unit (620) and the second display unit (630) (4). The game machine according to (FIG. 62).

(6) The effect control means is
The first start memory number display (special figure 1 hold number display 650) that displays the number of the first start memory and the second start memory number display (special figure 2 hold number display 660) that displays the number of the second start memory. ) Can be displayed on the display device (41).
Apart from the first notification image (620b), a first predetermined image (675) for notifying that the first variation display game is being executed is opposed to the first start storage number display (650). Can be displayed and
Apart from the second notification image (630b), a second predetermined image (676) that notifies that the second variation display game is being executed is opposed to the second start storage number display (660). The game machine (FIG. 62) according to (4) or (5), which is capable of displaying.

(7) The execution information (for example, game result or fluctuation pattern) of the first variable display game based on the first start memory is determined before the first variable display game based on the first start memory is executed. First pre-determination means (for example, game control device 100) and
A second determination of execution information (for example, a game result or fluctuation pattern) of the second variation display game based on the second start memory before the execution of the second variation display game based on the second start memory. A pre-determination means (for example, a game control device 100) is provided.
The effect control means
According to at least one of the determination result of the first pre-determination means for the first start memory and the determination result of the second pre-determination means for the second start memory, the notification display (holding display during fluctuation 680). The gaming machine according to any one of (4) to (6), characterized in that the mode is changed (FIG. 64).

(8) The effect control means sets the mode of the notification display (holding display during fluctuation 680), the degree of expectation that the first variable display game becomes the special result mode, and the second variable display game the special result mode. The game machine according to any one of (1) to (7), which is set according to at least one of the expected degrees (FIG. 64).

(1a) When an effect control means capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game for varyingly displaying identification information on a display device is provided and the result aspect of the variable display game is a hit result aspect, a game value is given to the player. In a game machine capable of generating a predetermined game state in which
A first control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and
A second control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a second variation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition is provided.
It is possible to set both the first variation display game by the first control means and the second variation display game by the second control means in the running state.
When one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game becomes the winning result mode, the other variable display game is forcibly terminated and the other variable display game is removed. As a result mode
The effect control means
A first notification display (special figure 1 changing hold display 620b) for notifying that the first variation display game is being executed, and a second notification display for notifying that the second variation display game is being executed. (Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Hold Display 630b) and can be displayed on the specific display unit (hold digestion area 640) of the display device.
A gaming machine characterized by erasing the first notification display and the second notification display when the first variation display game or the second variation display game is forcibly terminated (FIG. 63B (co)). ..

(1b) A game value is provided to a player when an effect control means capable of displaying an effect related to a variable display game for varyingly displaying identification information on a display device is provided and the result aspect of the variable display game is a hit result aspect. In a game machine capable of generating a predetermined game state in which
A first control means capable of executing the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and
A second control means capable of executing a second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition is provided.
It is possible to set both the first variation display game by the first control means and the second variation display game by the second control means in the running state.
When one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game becomes the winning result mode, the other variable display game is interrupted.
The effect control means
A first notification display (special figure 1 changing hold display 620b) for notifying that the first variation display game is being executed, and a second notification display for notifying that the second variation display game is being executed. (Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Hold Display 630b) and can be displayed on the specific display unit (hold digestion area 640) of the display device.
When the first variable display game is interrupted, the display mode of the first notification display is changed to suggest that the first variable display game is interrupted.
When the second variable display game is interrupted, the display mode of the second notification display is changed so as to suggest that the second variable display game is interrupted (FIG. 63C (FIG. 63C). Ko')).

(1c) When the effect control means capable of displaying the effect related to the variable display game for variable display of the identification information on the display device is provided and the result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, the game value is given to the player. In a game machine that can generate a special game state that can be granted
A first control means capable of executing the first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and
A second control means capable of executing a second variable display game based on the establishment of the second start condition is provided.
The effect control means
It is possible for the specific notification unit (holding digestion area 640) of the display device to notify that at least one of the first variation display game and the second variation display game is in the running state.
The specific notification unit includes a first notification unit (area corresponding to the special figure 1 variable pending display 620b) capable of notifying that the first variation display game is being executed, and the second variation display game. A gaming machine (FIG. 65), which includes a second notification unit (a region corresponding to the holding display 630b during special figure 2) capable of notifying that is in the running state.

(Effect of the first embodiment)
According to the game machine of (1) above, the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is provided by the notification display (holding display 680 during change) displayed on the specific display unit (holding digestion area 640) of the display device 41. And the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) can be clearly notified that both are in the running state. The player can easily recognize that both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state by simply looking at the notification display (variable hold display 680) for a short time. The interest will also improve.

Since it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game displayed on the display device 41 when the fluctuation is performed at high speed, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are displayed from the fluctuation display. It may be difficult to recognize that both are in the running state, and there is an advantage of displaying a notification display (holding display during fluctuation 680).

According to the game machine of (2) above, the notification display (changing hold display 680) is the first notification image (special figure 1 changing hold display 620b) and the second notification image (special figure 2 changing hold display 630b). Is included in an associative manner, so that it is easy to see as a whole. Therefore, the player can immediately determine whether or not both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state by just glancing at the notification display.

According to the game machine of the above (3), the player uses the first notification image (special figure 1 changing hold display 620b) and the second notification image (special figure 2 changing hold display 630b) in the notification display. 1 Remaining fluctuation time and special figure 2 Remaining fluctuation time can be visually recognized. As a result, the interest of the game is also improved.

According to the game machine of (4) above, the first start memory display (special figure 1 hold display 620a) and the first notification image (special figure 1 changing hold display 620b) are associated with each other, and the second start memory display (special figure 1 hold display 620b) is associated. 2 Hold display 630a) can be associated with the second broadcast image (Special Figure 2 Hold display 630b during change). Therefore, it is possible to produce a connected effect from the first display unit (620) to the specific display unit (reserved digestion area 640). In addition, it is possible to produce a connected effect from the second display unit (630) to the specific display unit (reserved digestion area 640). As a result, the interest of the game is also improved.

According to the game machine of (5) above, the first display unit (620) for displaying the first start memory display (special figure 1 hold display 620a) and the second start memory display (special figure 2 hold display 630a) are displayed. It becomes easy to check the second display unit (630) and the specific display unit (reserved digestion area 640) at the same time, and the occurrence status and digestion status of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold (variation display based on hold). You can check the game execution status) at the same time. As a result, the interest of the game is also improved.

According to the game machine (6) above, the player has a first start storage number display (special figure 1 hold number display 650) and a first predetermined image (notifying that the first variable display game is being executed). 675) can be viewed at the same time, and the occurrence status and digestion status of the first start memory (special figure 1 hold) can be confirmed at the same time. In addition, the second start storage number display (special figure 2 hold number display 660) and the second predetermined image (676) for notifying that the second variable display game is being executed can be viewed at the same time, and the second The occurrence status and digestion status of the start memory (holding in Special Figure 2) can be confirmed at the same time.

According to the game machine of (7) above, there is a continuity or a relationship between the display mode of the notification display (holding display during fluctuation 680) and the holding change notice (look-ahead effect) based on the judgment result of the prior judgment means. , Does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Further, depending on the mode of the notification display (holding display during change 680), the player can expect the results of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the game machine (8) above, when the hold change notice (look-ahead effect) according to the degree of expectation is executed, the display mode of the notification display (changing hold display 680) and the hold based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means There is continuity and relevance with the change notice (look-ahead effect), which does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Further, depending on the mode of the notification display (holding display during change 680), the player can expect the results of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, and the interest of the game is improved.

The game machine of the above (1a) has the effect of the game machine of the above (1). In addition, when the first variable display game or the second variable display game is forcibly terminated, both the first variable display game and the second variable display game are deleted in order to erase the first notification display and the second notification display. It is possible to more clearly notify that the state is being executed.

According to the game machine of the above (1b), the effect of the game machine of the above (1) is exhibited. In addition, when the first variable display game is interrupted, the display mode of the first notification display is changed to suggest that the first variable display game is interrupted, and the second variable display game is interrupted. In addition, in order to change the display mode of the second notification display so as to suggest that the second variable display game is interrupted, it is determined that both the first variable display game and the second variable display game are in the running state. It can be notified more clearly.

According to the game machine (1c), the specific notification unit is a first notification unit capable of notifying that the first variation display game is being executed, and a second variation display game being being executed. Since the second notification unit capable of notifying that is included, it is possible to clearly notify the player whether the first variation display game or the second variation display game is being executed.

(Second embodiment)

The second embodiment relates to warnings such as error and fraud notifications and striking instruction notifications (left-handed instruction notification, right-handed instruction notification). The configuration other than the configuration described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment.

[Warning setting process]
The details of the warning setting process (B1316) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 53) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure of warning setting processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received error / illegal / striking command is a normal command (B3001). If the command is not normal (the result of B3001 is "N"), the warning setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is a normal command (the result of B3001 is "Y"), the received command is also called an error / fraud occurrence command (error / fraud notification command, first warning command) related to error or fraud occurrence or notification. ) Is determined (B3002). If the received command is not an error / invalid command (the result of B3002 is "N"), the process proceeds to step B3007.

Among the error / illegal occurrence commands, the error occurrence command includes a gate abnormal passage occurrence command (A2414) indicating that the game ball has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 abnormally as an error, an overflow switch signal being turned on, and the like. Includes a state-on-command (A2507) that indicates as an error. The overflow switch signal is a signal for notifying that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (being full) as a ball removal error. Further, among the error / fraud occurrence commands, the fraud occurrence command includes a magnet fraud notification command (A7606) indicating that a magnet fraud has occurred and a panel radio wave fraud notification command (A7703) indicating that a panel radio wave fraud has occurred. Is done.

When the received command is an error / fraud occurrence command (the result of B3002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the display of the error / fraud notification screen for notifying the error or fraud on the display device 41. (B3003) (see also FIG. 70 (B)). The error / fraud notification screen includes an error / fraud display 851 (also referred to as a special display or a first warning display) indicating the occurrence of an error or fraud. The display period for displaying the error / illegal display 851 is the period between the reception of the error / illegal occurrence command and the reception of the error / illegal cancellation command. Then, when the error / invalid display 851 is displayed, it is determined whether or not the first left-handed instruction display 691 being displayed overlaps (overlaps) at least in part (B3004). That is, it is determined whether or not the set display areas of the error / invalid display 851 and the first left-handed instruction display 691 partially overlap.

As shown in FIG. 70A, the left-handed instruction display for urging the player to left-handed is displayed as the first left-handed instruction display 691 which is displayed large in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. There are two types of second left-handed instruction display 815, which is displayed small at the edge of the screen. In a normal case, the error / incorrect display 851 is displayed large in the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and when the error / incorrect display 851 and the first left-handed instruction display 691 occur at the same time, at least a part of the error / incorrect display 851 overlaps. Is set to. However, for some errors / illegals (for example, passing through a gate abnormality), that is, for some error / illegal occurrence commands, even if the error / invalid display 851 and the first left-handed instruction display 691 occur at the same time, they do not overlap. It may be set as follows. For the abnormal passage of the gate caused by hitting right during the normal game state, if the error / illegal display 851 and the first left hit instruction display 691 are displayed so that they do not overlap even if they occur at the same time, the game is played. It is possible to encourage a person to strongly left-handed.

When the error / invalid display 851 is displayed, the effect control device 300 overlaps with the first left-handed instruction display 691 being displayed at least in part (the result of B3004 is "Y"), and the first The left-handed instruction display 691 is erased (B3005). Therefore, the error / invalid display 851 (first warning display) is displayed with priority over the first left-handed instruction display 691 (second warning display). The first left-handed instruction display 691 may be changed to a light transparent display or a semi-transparent display without being erased. Further, in the portion where the error / illegal display 851 and the first left-handed instruction display 691 do not overlap, the first left-handed instruction display 691 may be displayed (that is, the error / illegal display 851 may be displayed as the first left-handed instruction display. A display method in which 691 is hidden and preferentially displayed on the front side may be used). After that, the error / fraud notification flag indicating that the error / fraud is being notified is set (B3006), and the warning setting process is terminated.

Although not shown in FIG. 68, when the error / illegal display 851 is displayed, it may overlap with the right-handed instruction display currently being displayed, for example, the error / incorrect display 851. And one of the right-handed instruction displays is displayed with priority over the other (the other is erased).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 displays the first left-handed instruction when the error / illegal display 851 is displayed but does not overlap with the first left-handed instruction display 691 being displayed (the result of B3004 is "N"). The 691 is maintained as it is, the error / unauthorized notification flag is set (B3006), and the warning setting process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command is an error / illegal release command (error / illegal notification end command) when the received command is not an error / illegal occurrence command (the result of B3002 is "N"). Is determined (B3007). When the received command is an error / fraud release command (the result of B3007 is "Y"), the error / fraud notification screen display end setting is set (B3008), and the error / fraud notification flag is cleared (B3009). ), Ends the warning setting process.

Among the error / illegal release commands, as the error release command, the gate abnormal passage release command (A2418) indicating that the error that the game ball abnormally passes through the normal figure start gate 34 has been released, and the overflow switch signal are turned on. A state off command (A2504) indicating that the ball removal error or the like has been cleared is included. Further, among the error / illegal release commands, the illegal release command includes the magnet illegal notification end command (A7611) for instructing the end of the magnet illegal notification and the panel radio wave illegal notification end command (A7707) for instructing the end of the radio wave illegal notification. ..

When the received command is not an error / illegal release command (the result of B3007 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the received command is a typing instruction notification command (B3010). The striking instruction notification command (also referred to as a second warning command) includes a left striking instruction notification command (A7503 or the like) and a right striking instruction notification command (A2705 or the like). When the received command is a hitting instruction notification command (left-handed instruction notification command or right-handed instruction notification command) (the result of B3010 is "Y"), the hitting instruction notification (left-handed instruction notification, right-handed instruction notification) ) Is executed (B3011), and the warning setting process is terminated. If the received command is not a typing instruction notification command (the result of B3010 is "N"), the warning setting process ends.

[How to hit instruction notification setting process]
The details of the striking instruction notification setting process (B3011) in the above-mentioned warning setting process (FIG. 68) will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the striking instruction notification setting process executed by the effect control device 300. In the striking instruction notification setting process, the striking instruction display (left striking instruction display or right striking instruction display) is set as the second warning display, and the striking instruction notification is executed.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received striking instruction notification command is a normal command (B3301). If the command is not normal (the result of B3301 is "N"), the striking instruction notification setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is a normal command (the result of B3301 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the received command is a left-handed instruction notification command (B3302).

The effect control device 300 sets the normal display setting of the right-handed instruction notification screen when the received command is not the left-handed instruction notification command (the result of B3302 is "N"), that is, when the right-handed instruction notification command is used. Perform (B3303), and end the striking instruction notification setting process. For example, in this normal display setting, if the right-handed instruction display overlaps with the error / incorrect display 851 being displayed at least in part, one of the error / incorrect display 851 and the right-handed instruction display is used as the other. Display with priority over. If they do not overlap, the right-handed instruction display is executed as usual.

On the other hand, when the received command is a left-handed instruction notification command (the result of B3302 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 updates the left-handed instruction frequency, which is the number of occurrences of the left-handed instruction in a predetermined period, by +1 ( Add only 1) (B3304). The left-handed instruction frequency is cleared to 0 every time a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) elapses. After that, it is determined whether or not the error / unauthorized notification flag (B3006) is set (B3305).

In the effect control device 300, when the error / illegal notification flag is not set (the result of B3305 is “N”), the error / illegal display 851 does not overlap with the left-handed instruction display, so that the left-handed instruction notification is given. The normal display setting of the screen is set, and both the first left-handed instruction display 691 and the second left-handed instruction display 815 are displayed and set (B3306). Therefore, when the left-handed instruction notification command is received, the left-handed instruction display is displayed for a predetermined display period. After that, the striking instruction notification setting process is terminated.

When the error / illegal notification flag is set (the result of B3305 is “Y”) and the first left-handed instruction display 691 is displayed, the effect control device 300 displays the error / illegal display 851. It is determined whether or not at least a part of the above overlaps (overlaps) (B3307). Even if the first left-handed instruction display 691 is displayed, if it does not overlap with the error / incorrect display 851 being displayed (the result of B3307 is "N"), the first left-handed instruction display 691 and the second left-handed instruction display Both 815 are displayed and set (B3306).

On the other hand, when the first left-handed instruction display 691 is displayed, the effect control device 300 overlaps with the error / incorrect display 851 being displayed at least in part (the result of B3307 is "Y"). A special display setting of the left-handed instruction notification screen is set so that only the second left-handed instruction display 815 is displayed (B3308). That is, the first left-handed instruction display 691 (second warning display) is not displayed, and the error / invalid display 851 (first warning display) is preferentially displayed. Therefore, when the left-handed instruction notification command is received, the left-handed instruction display is executed by the second left-handed instruction display 815 for a predetermined display period. The first left-handed instruction display 691 may be displayed in a light transparent display or a semi-transparent display, which is difficult to see. Further, in the portion where the error / illegal display 851 and the first left-handed instruction display 691 do not overlap, the first left-handed instruction display 691 may be displayed (that is, the error / illegal display 851 may be displayed as the first left-handed instruction display. A display method in which 691 is hidden and preferentially displayed on the front side may be used).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the left-handed instruction frequency in the predetermined period is larger than the predetermined value (for example, 3 times) (B3309), and if it is not large (the result of B3309 is "N"). The hitting instruction notification setting process is terminated. When the left-handed instruction frequency is higher than a predetermined value (the result of B3309 is "Y"), the display mode of the second left-handed instruction display 815 is changed according to the left-handed instruction frequency (B3310). For example, the size of the second left-handed instruction display 815 is increased according to the frequency of left-handed instructions (see also FIG. 73).

[Display screen example 1]
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing how an error / incorrect display 851 is displayed while the left-handed instruction display is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. FIG. 70A is a diagram in which the first left-handed instruction display 691 and the second left-handed instruction display 815 are displayed on the display screen. FIG. 70B is a diagram showing an error / invalid display 851 on the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 70A, the left-handed instruction display is displayed in a different form (display mode) and different positions from the first left-handed instruction display 691 (first instruction display) and the first left-handed instruction display 691. The second left-handed instruction display 815 (second instruction display) and the like are included. In addition, the left-handed instruction display is displayed with priority over the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game, and even if the left-handed instruction display and the variable display overlap, the left-handed instruction display is displayed on the front so as to hide the variable display. Displayed on the side.

The first left-handed instruction display 691 is displayed large in the center of the display screen, and the second left-handed instruction display 815 is displayed small in the lower part of the left end of the display screen. Therefore, even if the large first left-handed instruction display 691 overlaps with other displays such as error / illegal display 851 in the center of the display screen, the small second left-handed instruction display 815 is less likely to overlap with other displays, and the player Can surely convey the left-handed instruction.

The first left-handed instruction display 691 and the second left-handed instruction display 815 differ in one or more of size, color, pattern, and shape as a form. In the present embodiment, the first left-handed instruction display 691 and the second left-handed instruction display 815 are particularly different in size and shape.

The first left-handed instruction display 691 (first instruction display) can be displayed in the first display area 690 at the center of the display screen. In the present embodiment, the first left-handed instruction display 691 includes an arrow 690a and a character 690b (“left-handed”). Not limited to this, everything displayed in the first display area 690 including the background may be treated as the first left-handed instruction display 691. Further, one of the arrow 690a and the character 690b may be treated as the first left-handed instruction display 691. In FIG. 70A, the first display area 690 is displayed as an area surrounded by a frame, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of the arrow 690a and the character 690b itself may be regarded as the first display area 690. ..

The second left-handed instruction display 815 (second instruction display) can be displayed in the second display area 810 at the edge of the display screen. In the present embodiment, the second left-handed instruction display 815 is composed of an arrow. The second display area 810 is displayed separated from other areas by a frame. Then, the second display area 810 can also display information other than the second left-handed instruction display 815 (for example, special figure 1 hold number display 650, special figure 2 hold number display 660) as the information display area. Therefore, the player can visually recognize various information including the left-handed instruction only by looking at the second display area 810.

As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the display period of error / invalid display 851 (special display) is reached while the left-handed instruction display is displayed (the result of B3002 is “Y”), the error / incorrect display area 850 The error / invalid display 851 is preferentially displayed in the (special display area) (B3005). The error / illegal display 851 is displayed with priority over the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game, and even if the error / incorrect display 851 and the variable display overlap, the error / incorrect display 851 hides the variable display. Is displayed on the front side.

In the present embodiment, the error / illegal display 851 is composed of the character 850a (“error / illegal occurrence”). Not limited to this, anything displayed in the error / incorrect display area 850 including the background may be treated as an error / incorrect display 851. In FIG. 70B, the error / illegal display area 850 is displayed as an area surrounded by a frame, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of the character 850a itself may be regarded as the error / illegal display area 850.

The error / illegal display area 850 is set so as not to overlap the second display area 810, but at least a part of the error / illegal display area 850 is set to overlap the first display area 690. In some cases. In this case, the first left-handed instruction display 691 is erased (B3005), and the error / invalid display 851 is displayed with priority over the first left-handed instruction display 691. Therefore, the highly urgent error / illegal display 851 can be displayed with priority over the first left-handed instruction display 691 which is a mere instruction, which is beneficial to the player and the amusement park. The first left-handed instruction display 691 may be changed so as to be difficult to see, such as a light transparent display or a semi-transparent display, without erasing it.

When the display periods of the error / incorrect display 851 and the left-handed instruction display overlap in this way, even if the first left-handed instruction display 691 of the left-handed instruction displays is deleted in the overlapping period, the second The second left-handed instruction display 815 of the display area 810 continues to be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 together with the error / invalid display 851. Therefore, the player can confirm that he should hit left by the second left-handed instruction display 815.

[Display screen example 2]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a display screen of the display device 41 when the movable accessory 805 (movable body) as the board effect device 44 operates. In the second embodiment, the game machine 10 is provided with the movable accessory 805 on the left side with respect to the display device 41. FIG. 71 (A) is a diagram in which the movable accessory 805 is arranged at the initial position (first position). FIG. 71 (B) is a diagram in which the movable accessory 805 operates and is arranged at the operating position (second position). The effect control device 300 controls the operation of the movable accessory 805.

The movable accessory 805 has a window portion 805a which is a transparent portion or an opening. The rear can be visually recognized from the window portion 805a. The initial position of the movable accessory 805 is around the display device 41 (left side) and behind the center case 40, and the movable accessory 805 cannot be visually recognized from the front at the initial position.

The movable accessory 805 can perform an operation of moving from the initial position to an operation position in front of the display device 41. The player can visually recognize the movable accessory 805 in the operating position from the front. Further, the movable accessory 805 shields a part of the display screen of the display device 41 so that it cannot be visually recognized from the front at the operating position, but since the window portion 805a overlaps the second display area 810, the window portion 805a The information displayed in the second display area 810 (including the second left-handed instruction display 815) becomes visible. Therefore, the second left-handed instruction display 815 can be visually recognized even when the operation effect is performed by the movable accessory 805.

When the window portion 805a of the movable accessory 805 is composed of a lens, the window portion 805a is displayed in the second display area 810 at the operating position of the movable accessory 805 (second left-handed instruction display). (Including 815) can be enlarged and displayed.

[Second display area (information display area)]
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the display contents of the second display area 810 (information display area). The second display area 810 located at the edge of the display screen of the display device 41 is the center of the display screen, even when an error / illegal display 851 or an important effect (reach effect such as a movie effect) is executed. , Various information can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 72 (A), the second display area 810 has a special figure 1 hold number display 650 for displaying the number of special figure 1 hold, a special figure 2 hold number display 660 for displaying the number of special figure 2 hold, It is possible to display the first predetermined image 675 that can notify that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 that can notify that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, it is possible to display the second left-handed instruction display 815 that prompts the player to left-handed.

As shown in FIG. 72 (B), the second display area 810 can also display a right-handed instruction display 817 that prompts the player to hit right. The right-handed instruction display 817 and the second left-handed instruction display 815 may be displayed at substantially the same location, but are not displayed at the same time. Further, the right-handed instruction display 817 may be displayed together with the right-handed instruction display displayed large in the center of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 72 (C), the second display area 810 can also display the V winning display 819 that notifies the so-called V winning. V-winning means that when a game ball enters the V-winning opening (predetermined area), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state, one of the predetermined game states) after the end of the big hit is determined. .. For example, the V winning opening is provided inside the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39. The V winning opening (predetermined area) is opened only in the case of a probabilistic jackpot so that the game ball can pass through, and the V winning is notified by the V winning display 819 during the round game of the jackpot. The game control device 100 can detect the V winning through a sensor or the like that detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening, and when the V winning is detected, it is confirmed that the game control device 100 shifts to the probabilistic state after the big hit ends (flag). Is set), and information (command, etc.) indicating that a V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize by the V prize display 819 or the like.

Therefore, even if the effect during the round is executed or the error / incorrect display 851 is displayed in the center of the display screen, the V prize display 819 is used to win the V prize in the second display area 810 at the edge of the display screen. Can be notified. Even in the center of the display screen, another V winning display (second V notification display, second information display) is referred to as V winning display 819 in a form different from the V winning display 819 (first V notification display, first information display). It may be displayed at the same time. That is, the effect control device 300 displays the V winning display (V notification display, V information display) in both the second display area 810 at the edge of the display screen and the central area of the display screen when the V winning is triggered. Good.

It should be noted that this V prize notification can also be applied to a type 1 type 2 type mixer. In addition, in the type 1 type 2 mixer, the V winning opening can be opened by winning the special figure 2 starting winning opening, and by winning the V winning opening, the big hit (V) corresponding to the special drawing 2 big hit of the present embodiment. It is a model that causes a hit).

As shown in FIG. 72 (D), the second display area 810 can display the variation number notification 821 that notifies the high probability variation number, which is the variation number in the probability variation state (high probability state). The fluctuation number notification 821 may notify the number of fluctuations in the time saving state when there is a low probability time saving state (normal power support state). Further, the fluctuation number notification 821 may display the remaining number of fluctuations in the probability change state or the time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 72 (E-1) to (E-3), the second display area 810 may display the error / invalid display 828. For example, as the error / fraud display 828, the characters "Pull out the ball", "Radio wave fraud", and "Magnet fraud" indicating the ball removal error, the magnet fraud, and the board radio wave fraud are displayed. Even in the center of the display screen, the above-mentioned error / illegal display 851 is simultaneously displayed in a form different from the error / incorrect display 828. In the second display area 810 at the edge of the display screen, the error / fraud display 828 can notify the error / fraud, so that other displays such as important effects have priority over the error / fraud display 851 in the center of the display screen. The error / error can be notified by the error / error display 828 even when the error / error is executed.

In addition, the second display area 810 may display other information such as a round display indicating a round during a big hit.

[Change in display mode of left-handed display]
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the second left-handed instruction display 815 in the second display area 810.

As shown in FIGS. 73 (A-1) to (A-3), by the process of step B3310 of FIG. 69, the second left-handed instruction display 815 is displayed according to the left-handed instruction frequency, which is the number of occurrences of the left-handed instruction. The display mode (form) changes so as to become larger. The second left-handed instruction display 815 may be changed in another display mode according to the left-handed instruction frequency, such as changing the color according to the left-handed instruction frequency. Therefore, when the player continues to hit right in a state where he should hit left (normal game state) and the left hit instruction notification command is generated many times (B3302, A7503), the second left hit instruction display 815 is displayed. , It is possible to change to a display mode that attracts the player's attention and strongly urge the player to hit left.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73B, the second left-handed instruction display 815 vibrates and is displaced, and the display mode (display position) can be changed. The vibration direction of the second left-handed instruction display 815 is the left-right direction in FIG. 73 (B), but may be the up-down direction. As shown in FIG. 70 (B), the error / invalid display 851 is displayed, and among the left-handed instruction displays, only the second left-handed instruction display 815 is displayed without displaying the first left-handed instruction display 691. In this case, the second left-handed instruction display 815 vibrates and shakes. Therefore, even if the second left-handed instruction display 815 is small, it becomes conspicuous, and it is possible to encourage left-handedness only by the second left-handed instruction display 815. It is also possible to make the second left-handed instruction display 815 blink so that it stands out even if it is small.

〔Time chart〕
74 shows an error / invalidity with a left-handed instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691, second left-handed instruction display 815) due to the warning setting process of FIG. 68 (including the hitting instruction notification setting process of FIG. 69). It is a time chart which shows the state that the display 851 is performed.

FIG. 74 (A) shows a situation in which a left-handed instruction by a left-handed instruction notification command is repeatedly generated during an error / illegal notification. When the error / fraud notification starts, the error / fraud display 851 (special display, first warning display) is displayed in the error / fraud display area 850 (special display area) in the center of the display screen. After that, when the display period of the left-handed instruction display overlaps with the display period of the error / invalid display 851 due to the occurrence of the left-handed instruction notification command, the second left-handed instruction display 815 is displayed at the edge of the display screen in the overlapping period. 2 Only displayed in the display area 810 (information display area), the first left-handed instruction display 691 is not displayed (B3308).

In the overlapping period, the second left-handed instruction display 815 vibrates left and right and is displaced as shown in FIG. 73 (B). Further, in the overlapping period, the first left-handed instruction display 691 may be displayed in a light transparent display or a semi-transparent display.

FIG. 74 (B) shows a situation in which an error / illegal notification occurs during the left-handed instruction notification. During the left-handed instruction notification, the first left-handed instruction display 691 and the second left-handed instruction display 815 are usually displayed. Normally, the second left-handed instruction display 815 is stopped without vibrating. However, if an error / illegal notification occurs during the left-handed instruction notification, the display period of the error / illegal display 851 overlaps with the display period of the left-handed instruction display, and in the overlapping period, the first left-handed hit in the center of the display screen. The instruction display 691 is erased, and only the second left-handed instruction display 815 is displayed in the second display area 810 (information display area) at the edge of the display screen (B3005).

In the overlapping period, the second left-handed instruction display 815 vibrates left and right and is displaced as shown in FIG. 73 (B). Further, in the overlapping period, the first left-handed instruction display 691 may be displayed in a light transparent display or a semi-transparent display.

If a predetermined gaming state occurs during the display of the first left-handed instruction display 691 and / or the second left-handed instruction display 815, the first left-handed instruction display 691 and / or the second left-handed instruction display 815 Erase. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a left-handed instruction display is displayed where a right-handed player should hit in a predetermined game state.

Further, as a modification, it is possible to display the second left-handed instruction display 815 on a display device (sub-display device) other than the display device 41 or a display unit provided on the accessory (first left-handed instruction). Display 691 is displayed on the display device 41). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the display device 41 from overlapping with the second left-handed instruction display 815, and the second left-handed instruction display 815 can be reliably shown to the player. Further, in this case, all the above-mentioned information displayed in the second display area 810 (information display area) of the display device 41 including the second left-handed instruction display 815 is displayed on another display device (sub display device) or a combination. It may be displayed on a display unit provided on an object. That is, the information display area may be provided in another display device (sub display device) or a display unit.

(Game machine according to the second embodiment)
The second embodiment described above includes the gaming machines shown in the following (9) to (19), (9a), and (9b).

(9) A game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect related to the variable display game can be displayed on the display device (41). A predetermined gaming state (for example, a big hit state, a small hit state, a probable change state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player when the result mode of the variable display game becomes a predetermined result mode by providing the effect control means (effect control device 300). In a game machine that can generate a time saving state (Public power support state)
A launching means (ball launcher) that launches a game ball into the game area,
A variable winning device (normal variable winning device) in which a game ball can be converted into a winning easy state in which winning is easy and a winning non-easy state in which winning is difficult, and is easier to convert into the winning easy state than in the normal gaming state in the predetermined gaming state. A device 33, a first special variable winning device 38, and a second special variable winning device 39) are provided.
The launching means has a first launch mode (left-handed) in which the game ball is launched with the first launch force in response to an operation by the player, and a second launch force different from the first launch force. It is possible to launch a game ball with the second launch mode (right-handed) that launches a game ball.
The game is such that the game ball can be easily won when the variable winning device is launched in the second launch mode (right-handed) than in the first launch mode (left-handed). Located in area (32),
The effect control means
When the game ball is launched in the second launch mode (right-handed) in the normal game state, an instruction display (left-handed instruction display) instructing to launch the game ball in the first launch mode (left-handed). ) Can be displayed,
The instruction display (left-handed instruction display) is a first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691) and a second instruction display (second left) displayed in a different form and a different position from the first instruction display. A game machine characterized by including a hitting instruction display 815).

(10) The effect control means can display a special display (error / illegal display 851) for notifying that an error or an illegality has occurred on the display device (41).
When the display periods of the special display and the instruction display overlap, the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) of the instruction displays is displayed as the special display (error / incorrect display) in the overlapping period. The gaming machine according to (9), which can be displayed on the display device together with 851) (FIGS. 70 (B) and 74).

(11) The gaming machine (FIG. 73 (D)) according to (10), characterized in that the position of the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) is displaced during the overlapping period.

(12) The effect control means is
The first instruction display can be displayed in the first display area (690) at the center of the display device, and the second instruction display can be displayed in the second display area (810) at the end of the display device.
The special display can be displayed in the special display area (850) in which at least a part overlaps the first display area.
When the display period of the special display is reached during the display of the first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691), the first instruction display is deleted or changed so as to be difficult to see ( The gaming machine (FIG. 70) according to (10), characterized in (transparent display or semi-transparent display).

(13) The effect control means divides and displays the second display area (810) from other areas, and can display information other than the second instruction display in the second display area. The gaming machine according to the feature (12) (FIGS. 70 and 72).

(14) The predetermined game state (here, a probability change state) is determined when the game ball enters a predetermined area (V winning opening).
The gaming machine (FIG. 72 (C)) according to (13), wherein the effect control means notifies in the second display area that the predetermined gaming state has been determined.

(15) The movable body (movable accessory 805) that operates as the effect is provided, and the movable body has a window portion (805a) that makes the second instruction display visible when the movable body moves from the initial position to the operating position. The gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (14), characterized in that it is provided (FIG. 71).

(16) The effect control means displays the first instruction and / or displays the second instruction when the predetermined gaming state occurs during the display of the first instruction and / or the display of the second instruction. The gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (15), which comprises erasing.

(17) The effect control means is characterized in that the mode of the second instruction display is changed according to the frequency of displaying the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815). The gaming machine according to any one of (16) (FIG. 73).

(18) The effect control means is characterized in that the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) is displayed smaller than the first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691). The gaming machine according to any one of 9) to (17).

(19) The effect control means can display the first instruction display on the display device.
The gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (18), wherein the second instruction display can be displayed on a display device different from the display device.

(9a) A game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means capable of displaying an effect related to the variable display game on a display device. In the game machine
Equipped with a launching means (ball launcher) that launches a game ball into the game area in a launch mode that corresponds to the operation of the player.
The effect control means
It is possible to display an instruction display (left-handed instruction display or right-handed instruction display) instructing to launch the game ball in a predetermined firing mode.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the instruction display includes a first instruction display and a second instruction display displayed in a different form and at a different position from the first instruction display.

(9b) A game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means capable of displaying an effect related to the variable display game on a display device. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the result mode of the variable display game is the special result mode.
The game ball can be converted into a winning easy state and a winning non-easy state in which it is difficult to win, and is provided with a variable winning device that converts the game ball into the winning easy state rather than the normal gaming state in the special gaming state.
The game control means
When the game ball passes through a predetermined area in the variable winning device, it is determined that after the special game state, the game ball shifts to a specific game state (for example, a high probability state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect control means
When the transition to the specific gaming state is confirmed, it is possible to display information display (for example, V winning display, V notification display) notifying that the transition to the specific gaming state is confirmed.
The information display includes a first information display (for example, a first V notification display at the edge of the display screen) and a second information display (for example, in the center of the display screen) displayed in a different form and at a different position from the first information display. 2nd V notification display), and a gaming machine characterized by including.

(Effect of the second embodiment)
According to the game machine (9), the first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691) and the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) can be displayed in different forms and different positions. Even if one of the 1-instruction display and the 2nd instruction display overlaps with another display such as error / incorrect display 851, the other display is less likely to overlap with the other display, and the player can surely determine the launch mode of the game ball. You can check the instructions. Further, in various variations, the first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691) and the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) can be flexibly displayed.

According to the game machine of (10) above, the display periods of the special display (error / illegal display 851) and the instruction display (left-handed instruction display) overlap, and the special display (error / illegal display 851) is the first instruction display. Even if (first left-handed instruction display 691) is erased or hidden, the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) can be reliably displayed in the overlapping period. Therefore, the player can confirm the instruction of the launch mode of the game ball by the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815).

According to the gaming machine of (11) above, the position of the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) is set during the overlapping period of the special display (error / illegal display 851) and the instruction display (left-handed instruction display). It can be displaced (moved) to make it stand out (vibrate, etc.). Therefore, even if the special display (error / illegal display 851) erases or hides the first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691), the player can still use the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction). Attention will be paid to the display 815).

According to the game machine of (12) above, even if the display period of the special display (error / illegal display 851) is reached during the display of the first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691), the first instruction display (first instruction display (first)). 1 Since the left-handed instruction display 691) is erased or changed so as to be difficult to see, the special display (error / incorrect display 851) can be displayed in an easy-to-see manner.

According to the gaming machine of (13) above, the player can check various information including the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) at once by simply looking at the second display area (810). it can.

According to the game machine of the above (14), the second display area (810) even when the effect during the round is executed or the special display (error / illegal display 851) is displayed on the display device (41). ), It is possible to reliably notify that the predetermined game state has been confirmed (V winning).

According to the game machine (15), even when the movable body (movable accessory 805) moves to the operating position, the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display) is displayed through the window portion (805a) of the movable body. 815) can be visually recognized.

According to the game machine of (16) above, in the predetermined gaming state, although the second launch mode (right-handed) is recommended, the game ball is instructed to be launched in the first launch mode (left-handed). It is possible to prevent the first instruction display and / or the second instruction display from being displayed.

According to the game machine of (17), when the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) is repeatedly displayed, the display mode changes to the display mode in which the player gazes. Therefore, it is possible to strongly urge the player to operate the launching means (ball launching device) according to the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) to set the first launch mode (left-handed).

According to the game machine of (18) above, even if the large first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691) easily overlaps with other displays such as error / incorrect display 851, the small second instruction display (second left) The striking instruction display 815) is less likely to overlap with other displays, and can continue to prompt the player to perform the operation in the first firing mode (left striking).

According to the game machine (19), the effect of the display device (41) for displaying the first instruction display (first left-handed instruction display 691) and the second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) overlap. The second instruction display (second left-handed instruction display 815) can be reliably shown to the player, and the area for displaying the effect of the display device (41) can be expanded.

According to the game machine (9a) above, the first instruction display (for example, the striking instruction display in the center of the display screen) and the second instruction display (for example, the striking instruction display at the edge of the display screen) are displayed in different forms and different positions. Therefore, even if one of the first instruction display and the second instruction display overlaps with another display such as error / invalid display 851, the other display is less likely to overlap with the other display, and the player can surely play the game ball. You can check the instruction of the launch mode of. In addition, the first instruction display and the second instruction display can be flexibly displayed in various variations.

According to the gaming machine of (9b) above, when it is confirmed that the transition to the specific gaming state (for example, the high probability state) is made after the special gaming state (for example, the jackpot gaming state), the transition to the specific gaming state is confirmed. It is possible to display an information display for notifying the above, and the information display is a first information display (for example, a display at the edge of the display screen) and a second information display displayed in a different form and a different position from the first information display. (For example, the display in the center of the display screen) and. Therefore, even if one of the first instruction display and the second instruction display overlaps with the error / illegal display 851 or the like, the other is less likely to overlap with the error / illegal display 851 or the like, and the player is in a specific gaming state (for example, high probability). It can be clearly confirmed that the transition to the state) is made.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. It is also possible to apply the embodiment by making a change in which left-handed and right-handed are interchanged.

The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as pachislot machines other than pachinko machines.

The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the claims.

10 Game machine 12 Front frame (game frame)
25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 2nd start winning opening (2nd starting winning area)
38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board effect device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 Power supply 620 1st display 630 2nd display 640 Hold digestion area 680 Pending display during fluctuation 690 1st display area 691 1st left-handed instruction display 810 2nd display area 815 2nd left-handed instruction display 850 Error / invalid Display area 851 Error / incorrect display

Claims (1)

The variable display game is provided with a game control means capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and an effect control means capable of displaying an effect related to the variable display game on a display device. In a game machine capable of generating a predetermined gaming state advantageous to the player when the result aspect is the predetermined result aspect.
Launch means to launch a game ball into the game area,
It is provided with a variable winning device that can convert a game ball into a winning easy state and a winning non-easy state in which it is difficult to win, and makes it easier to convert the game ball into the winning easy state than in the normal gaming state in the predetermined gaming state. ,
The launching means launches a game ball with a first launch mode in which the game ball is launched with the first launch force and a second launch force different from the first launch force in response to an operation by the player. It is possible to launch a game ball with the second launch mode.
The variable winning device is arranged in the game area so that the game ball can be easily won in the case of being fired in the second firing mode than in the case of the first firing mode.
The effect control means
When the game ball is launched in the second launch mode in the normal game state, it is possible to display an instruction display instructing to launch the game ball in the first launch mode.
The instruction display includes a first instruction display and a second instruction display displayed in a different form and at a different position from the first instruction display.
The first instruction display can be displayed in preference to the identification information and superimposed on the identification information, and the error display displayed when an error occurs in the game machine has priority over the first instruction display. It is possible to display it on top of the first instruction display.
The second instruction display is a gaming machine characterized in that the second display mode can be changed from the first display mode to the second display mode depending on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition in one gaming state.

Images